0% found this document useful (0 votes)

181 views578 pages

GP PRO Ex Instructions

This document describes logic instructions available for use in logic programs on models that support logic. It lists 9 categories of instructions including basic, timer, counter, read/write, operation, function, comparison, conversion, and I/O driver instructions. For each category, it provides the instruction name and description. It notes that all the listed instructions can be used in logic programs on logic-enabled models.

Uploaded by

Machin

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

181 views578 pages

GP PRO Ex Instructions

Uploaded by

Machin

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 578

29 Ladder

Instructions

This chapter describes GP-Pro EX logic instructions. Instructions that can be used in logic
programs are described in detail.

29.1 Instructions....................................................................................................29-2
29.2 Instruction Notation List.................................................................................29-6
29.3 About Addresses You can Set up as Operands ..........................................29-34
29.4 Number of Steps Per Instruction .................................................................29-42
29.5 Instruction Descriptions...............................................................................29-43

29-1
Instructions

29.1 Instructions

The following table provides a list of instructions available for the logic program. Models
that support logic can use all of these instructions. The instructions are divided into the
following nine categories: (1) Basic, (2) Timer, (3) Counter, (4) Read/Write, (5) Operation,
(6) Function, (7) Comparison, (8) Conversion, (9) I/O Driver Instructions.
Category Instruction Name Instruction
Basic Bit Basics Normally Open NO
Normally Closed NC
Out OUT
Negative Out OUTN
Set SET
Reset RST
Pulse Basic Positive Transition PT
Down Transition NT
Program Jump JMP
Control Jump to Subroutine JSR
Return RET
Repeat Processing FOR
NEXT
Inverse INV
Exit EXIT
Power Bar Control PBC
Power Bar Reset PBR
Logic Wait LWA
Timer ⎯ On Delay Timer TON
Instruction Off Delay Timer TOF
Pulse Timer TP
Duration On Delay Timer TONA
Duration Off Delay Timer TOFA
Counter ⎯ Up Counter CTU
Instruction Down Counter CTD
Up/Down Counter CTUD
R/W Time Read/ Read Time JRD
Instruction Write Set Time JSET
Date Read/ Read Date NRD
Write Set Date NSET
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-2

Instructions

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-3

Instructions

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-4

Instructions

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-5

Instruction Notation List

29.2 Instruction Notation List

This list shows the categorized instruction names and symbols.

• The number of steps in each instruction depends on the data format of operands
and whether a modifier is used.
• For details about the number of steps, refer to the section that describes each
instruction.

29.2.1 Basic Instructions

Category Instruction Pro EX Number of Number of Ladder Symbol
Name Instruction Steps in the Operands
Notation Instructions
Normally NO 1 to 5 steps 1
Open
Normally NC 1 to 5 steps 1
Closed
Out OUT 1 to 5 steps 1
Bit Basic

Negative OUTN 1 to 5 steps 1

Out
Set SET 1 to 5 steps 1
Basic Instructions

Reset RST 1 to 5 steps 1

Positive PT 2 to 5 steps 1
Pulse Basic

Transition
Down NT 2 to 5 steps 1
Transition
Jump JMP 2 Step ⎯
Program Control

Positive JMPP 2 to 5 steps ⎯

Transition
Jump
Jump to JSR 2 Step ⎯
Subroutine
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-6

Instruction Notation List

Category Instruction Pro EX Number of Number of Ladder Symbol

Name Instruction Steps in the Operands
Notation Instructions
Positive JSRP 2 Step ⎯
Transition
Subroutine
Load
Return RET 1 Step ⎯

Repeat FOR 2 to 4 steps 1

Processing

NEXT 1 Step ⎯
Basic Instructions

Inverse INV 1 Step ⎯

Program Control

Exit EXIT 1 Step ⎯

Power Bar PBC 3 Step 2

Control

PBR 2 Step 1

Logic Wait LWA 2 Step 1

Instruction

(Note)
To use 1 step, the number of steps must be fewer than the clear bit variables (M address) +
1536. If more than 1536 bit variables are created with clear bit variable settings, there will be
2 steps.
Please configure retentive/volatile settings in the Retentive Settings dialog box.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-7

Instruction Notation List

29.2.2 Timer Instruction

Category Instruction Pro EX Number of Number of Ladder Symbol
Name Instruction Steps in the Operands
Notation Instructions
On Delay TON 2 Step 1
Timer

Off Delay TOF 2 Step 1

Timer

1
Timer Instruction

Pulse Timer TP 2 Step

Duration TONA 2 Step 1

On Delay
Timer

Duration TOFA 2 Step 1

Off Delay
Timer

29.2.3 Counter Instruction

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name

Counter Up Counter CTU 2 Step 1 Level

Instruction

CTUP 2 Step 1 Up Edge

Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-8

Instruction Notation List

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Counter Down Name CTD 2 Step 1 Level
Instruction Counter

CTDP 2 Step 1 Up Edge

Up/Down CTUD 2 Step 1 Level

Counter

CTUDP 2 Step 1 Up Edge

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-9

Instruction Notation List

29.2.4 R/W Instructions

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name

Time Read JRD 6 Step 1 Level

JRDP 6 Step 1 Up Edge

Time Read/Write
R/W Instruction

Time Set JSET 3 Step 2 Level

JSETP 3 Step 2 Up Edge

Date Read NRD 5 Step 1 Level

NRDP 5 Step 1 Up Edge

Date Read/Write
R/W Instruction

Date Set NSET 3 Step 2 Level

NSETP 3 Step 2 Up Edge

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-10

Instruction Notation List

29.2.5 Arithmetic Operation

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name

Add ADD 4 to 13 3 Level

steps

ADDP 4 to 13 3 Up Edge
steps

SUB 4 to 13 3 Level
steps
Arithmetic
Operation

Subtract

SUBP 4 to 13 3 Up Edge
steps

MUL 4 to 13 3 Level
steps
Multiplication

MULP 4 to 13 3 Up Edge
steps

Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-11

Instruction Notation List

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name
DIV 4 to 13 3 Level
steps
Division

DIVP 4 to 13 3 Up Edge
steps

MOD 4 to 13 3 Level
steps
Modulation
Arithmetic
Operation

MODP 4 to 13 3 Up Edge
steps

INC 2 to 4 1 Level
steps
Increment

INCP 2 to 4 1 Up Edge
steps

DEC 2 to 4 1 Level
steps
Decrement

DECP 2 to 4 1 Up Edge
steps

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-12

Instruction Notation List

29.2.6 Time Operation

in the Instructions
Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name

Time JADD 4 Step 3 Level

Addition

JADDP 4 Step 3 Up Edge

Time Operation
Operation

Time JSUB 4 Step 3 Level

Subtraction

JSUBP 4 Step 3 Up Edge

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-13

Operation
29.2.7
Category
Logical

Instruction

AND
Logical
Name
Instruction Notation List

Pro EX Instruction

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual

AND
Logical Operation

ANDP
Notation

Number of Steps

steps
steps

4 to 13
4 to 13

in Instruction

29-14
3
3

Number of
Operands

Determination
Level

of Input
Up Edge

Ladder
Symbol
Continued
Instruction Notation List

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name
Logical OR 4 to 13 3 Level
OR steps

ORP 4 to 13 3 Up Edge
steps

Logical XOR 4 to 13 3 Level

XOR steps
Operation

Logical

XORP 4 to 13 3 Up Edge
steps

Logical NOT 3 to 9 2 Level

NOT steps

NOTP 3 to 9 2 Up Edge
steps

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-15

Instruction Notation List

29.2.8 Transfer Instructions

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name

Transfer MOV 3 to 9 2 Level

(Copy) steps

MOVP 3 to 9 2 Up Edge
steps

Batch BLMV 6 to 10 3 Level

Transfer steps
(Blocks
Copy)

BLMVP 6 to 10 3 Up Edge
Operation

Transfer

steps

Multipoint FLMV 4 to 10 3 Level

Transfer steps
(Multipoint
Copy)

FLMVP 4 to 10 3 Up Edge
steps

Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-16

Operation Operation

29.2.9
Category Category
Shift Transfer

Instruction
Instruction Name
Name

Shift Left
Exchange
Instruction Notation List

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual

Pro EX Instruction Pro EX Instruction

Shift Instructions

SHL
XCH

SHLP
XCHP
Notation Notation

Number of Steps Number of Steps

steps
steps

steps
steps
3 to 7
3 to 7

in Instruction

4 to 10
4 to 10
in Instruction

29-17
3
3
2
2

Number of Number of
Operands Operands

Determination Determination

Level
Level

of Input of Input

Up Edge
Up Edge

Ladder Ladder
Symbol Symbol

Continued
Instruction Notation List

Pro EX Instruction
Instruction Name

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Shift Right SHR 4 to 10 3 Level
steps

SHRP 4 to 10 3 Up Edge
steps

Arithmetic SAL 4 to 10 3 Level

Shift Left steps
Operation

Shift

SALP 4 to 10 3 Up Edge
steps

Arithmetic SAR 4 to 10 3 Level

Shift Right steps

SARP 4 to 10 3 Up Edge
steps

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-18

Instruction Notation List

29.2.10 Rotation Instructions

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name

Rotate Left ROL 4 to 10 3 Level

steps

ROLP 4 to 10 3 Up Edge
steps
Operation

Rotation

Rotate Right ROR 4 to 10 3 Level

steps

RORP 4 to 10 3 Up Edge
steps

Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-19

Instruction Notation List

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name
Rotate Left RCL 4 to 10 3 Level
with Carry steps
Over

RCLP 4 to 10 3 Up Edge
steps
Operation

Rotation

Rotate Right RCR 4 to 10 3 Level

with Carry steps
Over

RCRP 4 to 10 3 Up Edge
steps

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-20

Instruction Notation List

29.2.11 Function Operations

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name

Sum SUM 4 to 10 3 Level

steps

SUMP 4 to 10 3 Up Edge
steps

Average AVE 4 to 10 3 Level

Calculate Function

steps
Function

AVEP 4 to 10 3 Up Edge
steps

Square SQRT 3 to 7 2 Level

Root steps

SQRTP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-21

Function
Category
Calculate Function

PID
Instruction
Name
Bit Count
Instruction Notation List

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual

Pro EX Instruction

PID
BCNT

Notation
BCNTP

Number of Steps

steps
steps
steps

3 to 9
3 to 9

in Instruction
10 to 18
5
2
2

29-22
Number of
Operands

Determination
Level
Level

of Input
Up Edge

Ladder
Symbol
Instruction Notation List

29.2.12 Trigonometric Function

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name

Sine SIN 3 to 7 2 Level

steps

SINP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

Cosine COS 3 to 7 2 Level

steps

COSP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps
Trigonometric
Function

Tangent TAN 3 to 7 2 Level

steps

TANP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

Arc Sine ASIN 3 to 7 2 Level

steps

ASINP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-23

Instruction Notation List

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name
Arc ACOS 3 to 7 2 Level
Cosine steps

ACOSP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

Arc ATAN 3 to 7 2 Level

Tangent steps
Trigonometric
Function

ATANP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

Cotangent COT 3 to 7 2 Level

steps

COTP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-24

Instruction Notation List

29.2.13 Other Functions

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Ladder
Name

Chart
Exponential EXP 3 to 7 2 Level
steps

EXPP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps
Miscellaneous function

Logarithm LN 3 to 7 2 Level
steps
Function

LNP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

Log Base LG10 3 to 7 2 Level

10 steps

LG10P 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-25

Instruction Notation List

29.2.14 Arithmetic Compare

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps i

Determination
n Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name

Comparison EQ 3 to 9 2 Level
(=) steps

Comparison GT 3 to 9 2 Level
(>) steps

Comparison LT 3 to 9 2 Level
(<) steps
Arithmetic Compare
Compare

Comparison GE 3 to 9 2 Level
(> =) steps

Comparison LE 3 to 9 2 Level
(< =) steps

Comparison NE 3 to 9 2 Level
(<>) steps

Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-26

Instruction Notation List

29.2.15 Time Compare

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name

Time JEQ 3 Step 2 Level

Compare
(=)

Time JGT 3 Step 2 Level

Compare
(>)

Time JLT 3 Step 2 Level

Compare
(<)
Time Compare
Compare

Time JGE 3 Step 2 Level

Compare
(> =)

Time JLE 3 Step 2 Level

Compare
(< =)

Time JNE 3 Step 2 Level

Compare
(<>)

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-27

Instruction Notation List

29.2.16 Date Compare

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name

Date Compare NEQ 3 Step 2 Level

(=)

Date Compare NGT 3 Step 2 Level

(>)

Date Compare NLT 3 Step 2 Level

(<)
Date Compare
Compare

Date Compare NGE 3 Step 2 Level

(> =)

Date Compare NLE 3 Step 2 Level

(< =)

Date Compare NNE 3 Step 2 Level

(<>)

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-28

Instruction Notation List

29.2.17 Data Conversion Instructions

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name

BCD BCD 3 to 7 2 Level

Convert steps

BCDP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

BIN BIN 3 to 7 2 Level

Convert steps

BINP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps
Data Convert

Encode ENCO 3 to 7 2 Level

Convert

steps

ENCOP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

Decode DECO 3 to 7 2 Level

steps

DECOP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

Convert to RAD 3 to 7 2 Level

Radian steps

Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-29

Instruction Notation List

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name
Convert to RADP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
Radian steps

Convert DEG 3 to 7 2 Level

Degree steps
Data Convert

DEGP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
Convert

steps

Scale SCL 7 to 11 2 Level

steps

SCLP 7 to 11 2 Up Edge
steps

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-30

Instruction Notation List

29.2.18 Type Conversion Instructions

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name

Integer → I2F 3 to 7 2 Level

Float steps

I2FP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

Integer → I2R 3 to 7 2 Level

Real steps
Type Convert
Convert

I2RP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

Float→ F2I 3 to 7 2 Level

Integer steps

F2IP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-31

Instruction Notation List

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps

Determination
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

of Input

Symbol
Ladder
Name
Float→ F2R 3 to 7 2 Level
Real steps

F2RP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

Real → R2I 3 to 7 2 Level

Integer steps

R2IP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

Real → R2F 3 to 7 2 Level

Float steps
Type Convert
Convert

R2FP 3 to 7 2 Up Edge
steps

Convert to H2S 3 to 5 2 Level

Seconds steps

H2SP 3 to 5 2 Up Edge
steps

Convert S2H 3 to 5 2 Level

Seconds to steps
Time

S2HP 3 to 5 2 Up Edge
steps

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-32

Instruction Notation List

29.2.19 I/O Driver

Pro EX Instruction

Number of Steps
in Instruction
Instruction

Number of
Operands
Category

Notation

Symbol
Ladder
Name

SDO Read SDOR 9 to 21 steps 6

SDO Write SDOW 9 to 21 steps 6

I/O Driver Instructions

CAN

Master Check DGMT 7 to 15 steps 4

Slave Check DGSL 5 to 9 steps 2

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-33

About Addresses You can Set up as Operands

29.3 About Addresses You can Set up as Operands

Outlines the symbol variables, connection device addresses, and constants that you can set as
operands in each instruction.
Because the content that you can configure differs depending on the instruction, refer to each
instruction description.

29.3.1 Connection Device Address

The address specified in the communication settings for a connection device.

Name Type Example Description

Connection Bit [PLC1]X0000 The bit address for the communication
Device device address specified in the
communication settings
Word [PLC1]D0000 The word address for the connection device
address specified in the communication
settings

29.3.2 Symbol
This function changes addresses in external devices into names that users can easily
understand. Make sure you map external device addresses to their respective names.
For example, To assign the name "RUN" to device address "X0000" on a Mitsubishi Electric
Corporation PLC, define "RUN" and "X0000."

Name Type Example Description

Symbol Bit RUN = X0000 This is a bit symbol configured in the
symbol variables list and defined by the
connection device address and the arbitrary
name.
Word Data = D0000 It is a word symbol configured in the symbol
variables list and defined by the connection
device address and the arbitrary name.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-34

About Addresses You can Set up as Operands

29.3.3 LS Address
This is the address of an internal memory area on a GP unit. Please note that how you specify
the address varies depending on the communication settings.
Name Type Example Description
Internal Bit [#INTERNAL]LS010000 Bit Specifications for GP
Memory Internal Memory
Word [#INTERNAL]LS0100 Word Specifications for GP
Internal Memory
Memory link Bit [#MEMLINK]010000 Bit Specifications for GP
settings Internal Memory
Word [#MEMLINK]0100 Word Specifications for GP
Internal Memory

• LS area and USR area words are 16-bits, but are treated as 32-bits when
processed by the Logic. However, the top 16 bits are ignored when used in a
display and other parts.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-35

About Addresses You can Set up as Operands

29.3.4 USR area

This is the internal memory area of a GP unit. Any specification method can be used.
Addressing from 0-29999 is available.
Name Type Example Description
USR area Bit [#INTERNAL]USR00 Bit Specifications for GP Internal
10000 Memory
Word [#INTERNAL]USR00 Word Specifications for GP
100 Internal Memory

• LS area and USR area words are 16-bits, but are treated as 32-bits when
processed by the Logic. However, the top 16 bits are ignored when used in a
display and other parts.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-36

About Addresses You can Set up as Operands

29.3.5 System Variable

This is the system area of a GP unit. Any connection device settings can be used.

• Some of the system variables used in logic programs work only when the
logic program is enabled. Attention must be paid when [Disable] is selected
for the logic program or you are using #L∗∗∗∗ logic variables.

Name Type Example Description

System Bit #L_Clock100ms GP System Variable Bit Type
Variable #L_Clock1sec
Integer #L_ScanTime GP System Variable Integer Type

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-37

About Addresses You can Set up as Operands

29.3.6 Variable
Variables are available for all GP models. You can use the variables without being aware of
device addresses. Variables can be used with modifiers (∗1) and as arrays (∗2). When using
modifiers, you can access individual bits or bytes in integer variables.

Name Type Example Description

Variable Bit Arbitrary Name Bit-type variable. Arrays allowed.
Integer Same as above Integer-type variable. Arrays and
modifier allowed.
Float Same as above 32-bit float variable. Arrays allowed.
Real Same as above 64-bit real variable. Arrays
allowed.
Timer Same as above Timer variable. Structure∗3
variable.
Counter Same as above Counter variable. Structure∗3
variable.
Date Same as above Date variable. Structure∗3
variable.
Sampling Same as above Time variable. Structure∗3
variable
PID Same as above PID variable. Structure∗3
variable.
∗1 You can use three different types of modifiers: bit modifier, byte modifier, and word
modifier. Only integer variables support modifiers.
Specification method: bit →VariableName.X[0], byte →VariableName.B[0], word →
VariableName.W[0]
∗2 You can specify consecutive memory addresses using arrays with the following variable
types: bit, integer, float, and real.
Specification method: VariableName[10]
∗3 Multiple variables grouped together are structures. Structure variables include: Timer,
Counter, Time, Date, and PID.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-38

About Addresses You can Set up as Operands

Structure Variable
Timer Variable
Timer Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.TI Bit Variable Turns ON when timer begins counting.
VariableName.Q Bit Variable Turns ON when the timer finishes counting.
VariableName.R Bit Variable Resets the current value on the timer. 0 clear.
VariableName.PT Integer Variable The value set on the timer.
VariableName.ET Integer Variable The current value on the timer.

Counter Variable
Counter Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.R Bit Variable Resets the current value. Clear (0).
VariableName.Q Bit Variable Turns ON when the current value reaches the
preset value.
VariableName.UP Bit Variable Turns ON while counting up.
VariableName.QU Bit Variable For Up/Down counters, turns ON when the current
value reaches the preset value.
VariableName.QD Bit Variable For Up/Down counters, turns ON when the current
value reaches 0 or less.
VariableName.PV Integer Variable Counter setting value.
VariableName.CV Integer Variable Current value on the counter.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-39

About Addresses You can Set up as Operands

PID Variable
PID Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.Q Bit Variable Completion Flag for PID Instruction Processing
VariableName.PF Bit Variable Processing Deadband Range Flag
VariableName.UO Bit Variable Output Values over the Upper Limit
VariableName.TO Bit Variable Output Values over the Lower Limit
VariableName.IF Bit Variable Integral Setting
VariableName.KP Integer Variable Proportional Constant
VariableName.TR Integer Variable Integral Calculus Time
VariableName.TD Integer Variable Differential Calculus Time a Time
VariableName.PA Integer Variable PID Processing Deadband Range
VariableName.BA Integer Variable Bias (Offset)
Variable name.ST Integer Variable Frequency in Sampling

When defining constants as operands

When entering constant values, enter them as shown in the following.
Real constant Use this when associating values with Real variables.
Input Format0r (zero and lowercase "r") Example, 0r0.11
Float constant Use this when associating values with Float variables.
Input Format0f (zero and lowercase "f") Example, 0f0.11
Constant HEX Input Use this when entering hexadecimal values in an integer
variable.
Input Format0x (zero and lowercase "x") Example, 0xFE

• When fractional values exceed 4 digits, the following notation is used.

Example)0f0.00001 -> 0f1e-05
0f0.000001 -> 0f1e-06

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-40

About Addresses You can Set up as Operands

29.3.7 Logic Device when using the Address Format

If you set Logic to Address Format, the following devices become available.

Name Type Name Description

Logic Bit X_ /Y_ /M_ Bit-type logic address
Address Integer D_ /I_ /Q_ Integer-type logic address. You can use
modifiers (same as variables).
Float F_ Float-type logic address.
Real R_ Real-type logic address
Timer T_ Timer-type logic address. It is a structure, the
same as a variable.
Counter C_ Counter-type logic address. It is a structure, the
same as a variable.
Date N_ Date-type logic address. It is a structure, the
same as a variable.
Time J_ Time-type logic address. It is a structure, the
same as a variable.
PID U_ PID-type logic address. It is a structure, the
same as a variable.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-41

Number of Steps Per Instruction

29.4 Number of Steps Per Instruction

The conversion of the number of steps per instruction is described. (For details on the
number of steps for each instruction, refer to the description of the relevant instruction.)
The following program uses only the output coil OUT which is always ON.

Definition of variable OUT

Variable name → out
Retentive settings → volatile
Array element → none

MAIN START takes 1 Step.

The beginning of a rung takes 1 Step.

Output coil instruction takes 1 Step.

(See instruction details)
MAIN END takes 2 Steps.

The total is 5 steps.

For 1 step instructions, the number of steps indicated below a rung number and the actual
number of steps may differ, as 1 step instructions are optimized upon saving and error
checking.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-42

Instruction Descriptions

29.5 Instruction Descriptions

29.5.1 Bit Instructions

NO (Normally Open) / NC (Normally Closed)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps in
Instruction
NO S1 Input 1 to 5
(Normally Open)
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps in
Instruction
NC S1 Input 1 to 5
(Normally Closed)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1).
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in Not
Instruction Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ 2 O
Device Word Specify a bit in the word. 3 O
Address (Example:
[PLC1]D0000.00)
Internal Bit ⎯ 2 O
Address Word Specify a bit in the word. 3 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS000000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ 2 O
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-43

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in Not
Instruction Possible: X
Variable Bit Arrays are not specified. 1 O
Format Specify inputs, outputs, or
up to 1536 Volatile items.
Arrays are not specified. 2 O
Retentive items or more than
1536 Volatile items.
Specify bit array ([constant]) 3 O
Specify bit array ([variable]) 4 O
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify integer 3 O
variable.X[constant]
Specify integer 4 O
variable.X[variable]
Specify integer 5 O
variable[constant/variable]
.X[constant/variable]
Variable Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Format
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Timer .Q / .TI / .R only 3 O
Counter .R / .UP / .QU / .QD / .Q 3 O
only
Date ⎯ ⎯ X
Time ⎯ ⎯ X
PID .Q / .UO / .TO / .PF / .IF 3 O
only
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-44

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in Not
Instruction Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ 1 O
Format Y_ ⎯ 1 O
M_ Within the clear type range 1 O
(M_0000 to M_1535)
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.X[constant] 3 O
D_∗∗∗∗.X[address] 4 O
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .Q / .TI / .R only 3 O
C_ .R / .UP / .QU / .QD / .Q 3 O
only
N_ ⎯ ⎯ X
J_ ⎯ ⎯ X
U_ .Q / .UO / .TO / .PF / .IF 3 O
only

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-45

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the NO Instruction

• Use a NO instruction to determine the ON or OFF state. The NO instruction can be used
to determine the ON or OFF state of an external input or an internal coil.
• You cannot use a NO instruction without including another instruction just to the left of
the right power bar. The other instruction can be an output instruction or any instruction
other than an input.

Program example

1
Start
0

1
Motor
0

A B

Point A When the bit variable Start turns ON, the NO instruction closes the contacts
and the bit variable Motor turns ON.
Point B When the bit variable Start turns OFF, the NO instruction opens the contacts
and the bit variable Motor turns OFF.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-46

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the NC Instruction

• Use a NC instruction to determine the ON or OFF state. The instruction can be used to
determine the ON or OFF state of an external input or an internal coil.
• You cannot use a NC instruction without including another instruction just to the left of
the right power bar. The other instruction can be an output instruction or any instruction
other than an input.

Program example

1
Start
0

1
Motor
0

A B

Point A When the bit variable Start turns ON, the NC instruction opens the contacts
and the bit variable Motor turns OFF.
Point B When the bit variable Start turns OFF, the NC instruction closes the contacts
and the bit variable Motor turns ON.
Note: To retain the state when the power is turned OFF, set the symbol variable to
Retentive. Use a keep address for the address format. (The keep setting cannot
be used for external inputs and outputs.)

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-47

Instruction Descriptions

OUT (Output Coil) / OUTN (Negative Output Coil)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps in
Instruction
OUT D1 Output 1 to 5
(Output Coil)
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps in
Instruction
OUTN D1 Output 1 to 5
(Negative Output Coil)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1).
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in Not
Instruction Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ 2 O
Device Word Specify a bit in the word. 3 O
Address (Example:
[PLC1]D0000.00)
Internal Bit ⎯ 2 O
Address Word Specify a bit in the word. 3 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS000000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ 2 O
Word ⎯ ⎯ X

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-48

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in Not
Instruction Possible: X
Variable Bit Arrays are not specified. 1 O
Format Up to 1536 Outputs set to
Volatile
Arrays are not specified. 2 O
Retentive items or more than
1536 Volatile items.
Specify bit array ([constant]) 3 O
Specify bit array ([variable]) 4 O
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify integer 3 O
variable.X[constant]
Specify integer 4 O
variable.X[variable]
Specify integer 5 O
variable[constant/variable]
.X[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Timer .Q / .TI / .R only 3 O
Counter .R / .UP / .QU / .QD / .Q 3 O
only
Date ⎯ ⎯ X
Time ⎯ ⎯ X
PID .Q / .UO / .TO / .PF / .IF 3 O
only
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-49

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in Not
Instruction Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ 1 O
M_ Within the clear type range 1 O
(M_0000 to M_1535)
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.X[constant] 3 O
D_∗∗∗∗.X[address] 4 O
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .Q / .TI / .R only 3 O
C_ .R / .UP / .QU / .QD / .Q 3 O
only
N_ ⎯ ⎯ X
J_ ⎯ ⎯ X
U_ .Q / .UO / .TO / .PF / .IF 3 O
only

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-50

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the OUT Instruction

• Use an OUT instruction to output an ON or OFF result. Use the OUT instruction to turn
ON or OFF an external input or an internal coil.
• Only one OUT instruction can be used in one rung. If a branch instruction is used, multiple OUT
instructions can be used.
• Place OUT instructions immediately to the left of the right power bar.

Program example

1
Start
0

1
Motor
0

A B

Point A When the bit variable Start turns ON, the bit variable Motor of the OUT
instruction turns ON.
Point B When the bit variable Start turns OFF, the bit variable Motor of the OUT
instruction turns OFF.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-51

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the OUTN Instruction

• Use an OUTN instruction to invert and output an ON or OFF result. Use this instruction to
turn ON or OFF an external input or an internal coil.
• Only one OUTN instruction can be used in one rung. If a branch instruction is used,
multiple OUTN instructions can be used.
• Place OUTN instructions immediately to the left of the right power bar.

Program example

1
Start
0

1
Motor
0

A B

Point A When the bit variable Start turns ON, the bit variable Motor of the OUTN
instruction turns OFF.
Point B When the bit variable Start turns OFF, the bit variable Motor of the OUTN
instruction turns ON.
Note: To retain the state when the power is turned OFF, set the symbol variable to
Retentive. Use a keep address for the address format. (The keep setting cannot
be used for external inputs and outputs.)

When using multiple OUT and OUTN instructions

The example above shows how to use multiple OUT instructions by branching OUT
instructions. An error will occur if OUT_001 and OUT_002 are placed in a series.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-52

Instruction Descriptions

SET (Set Coil) / RST (Reset Coil)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps in
Instruction
SET D1 Output 1 to 5
(Set Coil)
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps in
Instruction
RST D1 Output 1 to 5
(Reset Coil)

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-53

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-54

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-55

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the SET and RST Instructions

• The SET instruction keeps the ON state regardless of the input state.
• The RST instruction keeps the OFF state regardless of the input state.
• Use the SET and RST instructions to turn ON or OFF external outputs or internal coils.
• Only one OUT instruction can be used in one rung. If a branch instruction is used, multiple OUT
instructions can be used.

Program example

1
Start
0

Motor 1
0

1
Stop
0

A B C D

Point A The bit variable (Start) turns ON, the SET instruction executes, and then, bit
variable (Motor) turns ON.
Point B The bit variable (Start) turns OFF; however, bit variable (Motor) keeps the ON state.
Point C The bit variable (Stop) turns ON, the RST instruction executes. Then, bit
variable Motor turns ON.
When the RST instruction turns the bit variable (Motor) ON, the state is
cleared and the bit variable (Motor) changes from ON to OFF.
Point D The bit variable (Motor) remains in the OFF state until the bit variable (Start)
turns ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-56

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.2 Pulse Instruction

PT (Positive Transition) / NT (Negative Transition)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps in
Instruction
PT S1 Input 2 to 5
(Positive Transition)
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps in
Instruction
NT S1 Input 2 to 5
(Negative Transition)

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-57

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in Not
Instruction Possible: X
Variable Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
Format specified
Specify integer 3 O
variable.X[constant]
Specify integer 4 O
variable.X[variable]
Specify integer 5 O
variable[constant/variable]
.X[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Timer .Q / .TI / .R only 3 O
Counter .R / .UP / .QU / .QD / .Q 3 O
only
Date ⎯ ⎯ X
Time ⎯ ⎯ X
PID .Q / .UO / .TO / .PF / .IF 3 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ 2 O
Format Y_ ⎯ 2 O
M_ ⎯ 2 O
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.X[constant] 3 O
D_∗∗∗∗.X[address] 4 O
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .Q / .TI / .R only 3 O
C_ .R / .UP / .QU / .QD / .Q 3 O
only
N_ ⎯ ⎯ X
J_ ⎯ ⎯ X
U_ .Q / .UO / .TO / .PF / .IF 3 O
only

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-58

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the Positive Transition (PT) Instruction

• When a PT instruction bit variable turns ON, only the first scan turns ON. Subsequent
scans are OFF even though the bit variable may be in the ON state. You can use the PT
instruction for counting the number of ON states.
• You cannot use a NO instruction without including another instruction just to the left of
the right power bar. The other instruction can be an output instruction or any instruction
other than an input.

Program example

Previous Current Next scan Scan after the

scan scan next scan
1
Start
0

Motor 1
0

Positive Transition
A B C

Point A The variable (Start) turns ON, and then the variable motor turns ON.
Point B After a scan is executed one time, the variable (Motor) is turned OFF.
Point C The variable (Motor) remains OFF because the upward transition of the
variable (Start) is not detected.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-59

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the Negative Transition (NT) Instruction

• When an NT instruction is executed, if the variable that was ON during the previous scan
is turned OFF during the current scan, the NT instruction will execute only during the
current scan. The NT instruction cannot execute on an initial scan, because the state of the
previous scan is always considered to be OFF. Therefore, on an initial scan, the NT
instruction will not be conducted even after the instruction is executed. The following
example describes the features of the NT instruction.

Program example

Previous Current scan Next scan Scan after the

scan next scan

1
Start
0

1
Motor
0

Negative
Transition A B C

Point A The variable (Start) turns OFF, and then variable motor turns ON.
Point B After a scan is executed once, the variable motor will be turned OFF.
Point C The variable (Motor) remains OFF because the upward transition of the
variable (Start) is not detected.

(Supplementary) For the positive transition and negative transition instruction operands, you
must pay attention when performing indirect addressing to each element,
especially when an element is specifying an array or bit using variables. The
variable in the operand of the previous execution is compared with the variable
in the operand of the current execution, and then an instruction is executed.
Therefore, if the variable value to be specified is different, the target for
comparison will differ.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-60

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.3 Program Control

JMP (Jump) / JMPP (Positive Transition Jump)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
JMP Control 2
(Jump)
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
JMPP Control 2
(Negative Transition
Jump)
Up to 192 labels can be specified for a JMP instruction. When specifying a label for the JMP
destination, previously specified label names will display. (If a label has not been specified,
the label name will not display.) Insert the label first and then specify the label for the jump
instruction.

Specifying Labels
Right-click and select [Insert Label], or on the [Logic] menu
click [Insert Label].
You can select a label from 192 labels ranging from LABEL-
001 to LABEL-192.
Label names cannot be arbitrarily specified.

Only labels used in the program are displayed. The same

label names cannot be used on the INIT, MAIN, and SUB
screens.

When you execute a JMP instruction, the program will jump to the specified label. Unlike a
JSR instruction, the program does not automatically return to the rung of the jump source. It
is not possible to jump over the INIT or SUB block. Create a program that jumps to a label
within a block. Also, note that if the program jumps up the program, it may result in an
infinite loop.
A JMPP instruction executes a jump instruction only when an upward transition is detected.
The processing after a jump is the same as the JMP instruction.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-61

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
JMP

When the NO variable (Jump) is turned ON, the JMP instruction will be executed and the
program will jump to the fourth rung set with the label name: "LABEL-001".
After the jump, the program continues executing after the fourth rung. As long as the
Normally Open (NO) instruction remains ON, the program in the third rung will not execute.

Program Example
JMPP

Only the upward transition of the normally open instruction is detected, and the JMPP
instruction executes. Then, the program jumps to the fourth rung with the label name:
"LABEL-001". After the jump, the program continues executing after the fourth rung.
During subsequent scans, the JMPP instruction does not execute, even if the normally open
instruction remains ON. After one scan, the program in the third rung executes.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-62

Instruction Descriptions

JSR (Subroutine Call) / JSRP (Positive Transition Subroutine Call)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
JSR Control 2
(Subroutine Call)
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
JSRP Control 2
(Positive Transition
Subroutine Call)
Using JSR instructions you can specify up to 32 subroutines.
To define a jump to a subroutine, first create the subroutine. Without a subroutine, you cannot
define a subroutine jump. You can define jumps only to subroutines that are already created.

Specifying Subroutines
To create a subroutine screen, on the [Screen List Window] select [New Screen], or on the
[Screen] menu click [New Screen].

The destinations you can specify for a subroutine instruction are SUB-01 to SUB-32.
The subroutine name is fixed and cannot be arbitrarily named.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-63

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
JSR

When the normally open instruction is turned ON to indicate a problem, the JSR instruction
will be executed. The JSR instruction jumps to the subroutine screen "SUB-01" and executes
the program. When "SUB-01" ends, the program will return to the rung after the JSR
instruction and continue executing. In subsequent scans, if the normally open instruction is
still ON, the JSR instruction will execute. Place JSR instructions at the end of rungs.
Place a JSR instruction in the last row.

Program Example
JSRP

When the upward transition of a normally open instruction is detected the JSRP instruction
executes. The JSRP instruction jumps to the subroutine screen "SUB-01" and executes the
program. When "SUB-01" ends, the program returns to the rung after the JSRP instruction
and continues executing. In subsequent scans, if the normally open instruction remains ON,
the JSRP instruction will not execute. After the first scan, the subroutine does not run, and
the program continues executing rungs that follow. Place JSRP instructions at the end of
rungs.
After one scan, the subroutine processing is not performed, and the processing in the next
rung is performed.
Place a JSRP instruction in the last row.

Restrictions
(1) JSR and JSRP instructions are placed only at the right end of a row.
(2) A subroutine jump is possible up to 128 times.
One stack is used for one subroutine jump. A total of 128 stacks can be used for a logic
program.
Other instructions that use stacks are FOR and NEXT instructions. Each instance of FOR/
NEXT instructions use two stacks.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-64

Instruction Descriptions

RET(Return)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
RET Control 1
(Return)

RET instructions return the program from a subroutine to the original JSR instruction call,
and continues executing instructions in rungs that follow.
Use RET instructions to interrupt the subroutine and return to the MAIN program.
Because the program automatically returns to the caller after the subroutine processing ends,
it is not always necessary to use an RET instruction.
Place RET instructions at the end of rungs. RET instructions can only be used in subroutines.

Program Example
RET

RET instructions can only be used in subroutines. When the subroutine call instruction is
executed in MAIN, the program flow moves to the subroutine. The subroutine processes
instructions in rungs 1 and 2. If the variable for the normally open instruction in rung 3 is
ON, the RET instruction is executed and returns the program flow to MAIN without
executing the fourth rung.
When the RET instruction is not executed, the program is executes the fourth rung, then
returns the program to MAIN after the subroutine ends (END).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-65

Instruction Descriptions

FOR NEXT (Repeat)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
FOR Control 2 to 4
(Repeat)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
NEXT Control 1
(Repeat)

Operand Settings
The following table lists the configurable conditions of Operand (S1) in the FOR instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in Not
Instruction Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 2 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify a bit in the word. 2 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS000000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 2 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-66

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in Not
Instruction Possible: X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 2 O
specified
Specify integer 3 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 4 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.X[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Timer .PT / .ET only 2 O
Counter .PV / .CV only 2 O
Date .ΨΡ / .ΜΟ / .∆ΑΨ ονλψ 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-67

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in Not
Instruction Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 2 O
Q_ ⎯ 2 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.X[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.X[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant ⎯ 0 to 2147483647 2 O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-68

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of FOR and NEXT Instructions

FOR and NEXT instructions repeat the logic between FOR and NEXT the number of times
specified in S1. After the processing between the FOR and NEXT instructions has been
executed the number of times specified in S1, the rung that follows the NEXT instruction
will run without any conditions. When S1 is 0 or less, the logic between FOR and NEXT will
not execute and the program will jump to the rung that follows the NEXT instruction.
Always use FOR and NEXT instructions as a pair. These instructions always run.

Program Example
FOR and NEXT
Other instructions cannot coexist on the same rung as FOR and NEXT instructions. You can
use a JMP instruction to specify conditions for executing FOR and NEXT instructions. The
following program example of FOR and NEXT instructions shows how you can use a
condition to run FOR and NEXT instructions.

When the variable of the normally open instruction turns ON FOR and NEXT will not
execute, and the program will jump to "LABEL-001". When the variable is OFF, the FOR
and NEXT instructions execute. The value (N) of the FOR instruction's operand S1 indicates
the number of times that the rungs between the FOR and NEXT instructions will be repeated.
When S1 = 10, the FOR loop is repeated 10 times. After exiting the FOR loop, processing
continues with instructions that follow the NEXT instruction.
Restrictions
(1) After inserting a FOR instruction, you need to also insert the corresponding NEXT
instruction.
(2) Do not insert instructions on the same rung before or after FOR to NEXT instructions.
(You cannot set any conditions on rungs with FOR or NEXT instructions.)
(3) You cannot change the number of executions between FOR and NEXT instructions.
(4) You cannot exit FOR and NEXT instructions midway.
(5) You can nest FOR and NEXT instructions up to 64 times. After exceeding 64 nests, a
major error occurs and error code 4 is written to# L_FaultCode.
(6) For each nest, two stacks are used. A total of 128 stacks can be used in the logic program.
Other than the FOR and NEXT instructions, the JSR instruction also uses stacks. The JSR
instruction uses only one stack.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-69

Instruction Descriptions

INV(Invert)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
INV Control 1
(Invert)

Explanation of the Invert (INV) Instruction

When an INV instruction is executed, invert processing is performed. If the state is OFF
before the INV instruction is executed, the state will be inverted to ON.
If the state is ON before the INV instruction is executed, the state will change to OFF as a
result of the INV instruction.

Program example

When the operand of the normally open instruction is ON, the INV instruction will execute
and the OUT coil turns OFF.
When the operand of the normally open instruction is ON, the INV instruction will execute
and the OUT coil turns OFF.

EXIT(End of Processing)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
EXIT Control 1
(End of Processing)

Explanation of the EXIT Instruction

An EXIT instruction can be used only in the MAIN program. After this instruction is
executed, the program jumps to END.
After the instruction has been executed, processing of instructions between EXIT and END is
not performed. This instruction jumps to the END label in the same way as a jump
instruction.

Program example

When the switch is turned ON, the EXIT instruction at the end of the rung will run.
Therefore, processing of instructions between EXIT and END is not performed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-70

Instruction Descriptions

PBC (Power Bar Control) and PBR (Power Bar Reset)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
PBC Control 3
(Power Bar Control)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
PBR Control 2
(Power Bar Reset)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1) and (D1) in the PBC
instruction.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in Not
Instruction Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify a bit in the word. ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS000000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-71

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in Not
Instruction Possible: X
Variable Bit Bit specifications (D1 3 O
Format operand only)
Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.X[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-72

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in Not
Instruction Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ (D1 operand only) 3 O
M_ (D1 operand only) 3 O
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.X[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.X[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Constant ⎯ 0 to 7 (S1 operand only) 3 O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-73

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands (S1) in the PBR instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps Not
Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify a bit in the word. ⎯ X
Address (Example:
[PLC1]D0000.00)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify a bit in the word. ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS000000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable.X[constant]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable.X[variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.X[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Timer .Q / .TI / .R only ⎯ X
Counter .R / .UP / .QU / .QD / .Q ⎯ X
only
Date ⎯ ⎯ X
Time ⎯ ⎯ X
PID .Q / .UO / .TO / .PF / .IF ⎯ X
only
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-74

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps Not
Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.X[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.X[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .Q / .TI / .R only ⎯ X
C_ .R / .UP / .QU / .QD / .Q ⎯ X
only
N_ ⎯ ⎯ X
J_ ⎯ ⎯ X
U_ .Q / .UO / .TO / .PF / .IF ⎯ X
only
Constant ⎯ 0 to 7 (S1 operand only) 2 O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-75

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the Power Bar Control (PBC) and Power Bar Reset (PBR)
Instructions
When a PBC instruction is executed, the program between PBC and PBR will be executed.
PBC and PBR instructions can be used only in MAIN. They cannot be used in other parts of
the program.
When the PBC instruction is turned ON, the bit variable in D1 will turn ON. The program
running between PBC and PBR instructions executes ON processing until the PBC
instruction turns OFF.
For every PBC instruction, one PBR instruction is always required.
PBC/PBR instruction S1 specifies nesting level. The processing of the specified level
between PBC and PBR is executed.

Program example (without nesting)

When the variable of the normally open instruction is ON, the PBC instruction will execute.
When the PBC instruction is executed, processing between PBC and PBR instructions is
executed.

(1) When the PBC instruction is OFF (PBC execution bit is OFF)
The ADD instruction does not execute even when the normally open instruction in the
third rung is ON.
The MOV instruction does not execute even when the normally open instruction in the
fourth rung is ON.

(2) When the PBC instruction is ON (PBC execution bit is ON)

The ADD instruction is executed when the normally open instruction in the third rung
turns ON.
The MOV instruction is executed when the normally open instruction in the fourth rung
turns ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-76

Instruction Descriptions

State of Each Instruction

Elements that keep their state: Elements driven by an accumulative timer, counter, or SET
and RST instructions.
Elements that turn OFF: Elements driven by a timer and an OUT instruction.

Program example (with nesting, three levels)

(3)

(2)

(1)

PBC instruction Nesting

A PBC instruction can be programmed with up to eight levels of nesting.
When a PBC instruction is used within a PBC instruction, nesting level numbers (S1) must
be incremented.
(0→1→2→3→4→5→6→7)
To release nesting levels, use a PBR instructions.
(7→6→5→4→3→2→1→0)
For example, if you release the nested PBR 5 without releasing PBR 6 and PBR 7, nesting
levels down to the fifth level will be released.

(1) This is nesting level 2. In the previous program, the state is low.
(2) This is nesting level 1. In the previous program, the state is medium.
(3) This is nesting level 0. In the previous program, the state is high.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-77

Instruction Descriptions

LWA(Logic Wait)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
LWA Control 2
(Logic Wait)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operand (S1).
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps Not
Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify a bit in the word. ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS000000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.X[constant/variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-78

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps Not
Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.X[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.X[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Constant ⎯ 1 to 10 2 O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-79

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the Logic Wait (LWA) Instruction

An LWA instruction stops the logic for the time specified in S1. If a flicker occurs while a
movie is being played, use the LWA instruction.
You can use LWA instructions to prevent flickering while a movie is played. The flow of
execution Power always passes through the LWA instruction.

(Notes)
If a large number of LWA instructions are used, a WDT (watch dog time) error may occur.
Attention must be paid when using LWA instructions since WDT errors affect the scan time.

Restrictions on use
(1) If a large number of LWA instructions are used, a WDT (watch dog time) error may occur.
Attention must be paid when using LWA instructions since WDT errors affect the scan
time.
(2) Only one LWA instruction can be placed in one rung.
(3) An LWA instruction must be the last instruction on the rung, just to the left of the right
power bar.
(4) An LWA instruction can be used only in MAIN and SUB. It cannot be used in INIT.

Program example

(1) When the bit variable is turned ON, the LWA instruction will be executed.
(2) When the LWA instruction is executed, the logic program stops for the time (1 to 10 ms)
specified in operand S1.
(3) After the specified time has elapsed, processing will continue on the next rung.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-80

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.4 Timer Instruction

TON (ON Delay Timer) and TOF (OFF Delay Timer)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
TON Timer 2
(On Delay Timer)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
TOF Timer 2
(Off Delay Timer)

Explanation of the ON Delay Timer (TON) and OFF Delay Timer (TOF)
Instructions
Timer variables used in TON and TOF instructions are structure variables. The following
table lists the internal structures.

Timer Variable
Timer Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.TI Bit Variable Turns ON when the timer begins.
VariableName.Q Bit Variable Turns ON upon completion of the timer.
VariableName.PT Integer Variable The value set on the timer
VariableName.ET Integer Variable The current value on the timer
Double-click the timer instruction to display the following dialog box. Enter the preset time
in this dialog box.
Enter the timer value and units.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-81

Instruction Descriptions

For time-based settings, double-click the timer instruction to display the setup dialog box.
Time base Description PT value/ET value
ms Specify the time in The PT value is specified and displayed in units of ms.
units of ms. The ET value is displayed in units of ms.
Setting range = 0 to 2147483647 x 1ms
10ms Specify the time in The PT value is set and displayed in units of 10 ms.
units of 10 ms. The ET value is displayed in units of 10 ms.
Setting range = 0 to 214748364 x 10 ms
0.1s Specify the time in The PT value is specified and displayed in units of 0.1 s.
units of 0.1 s. The ET value is displayed in units of 0.1 s.
Setting range = 0 to 21474836 x 100 ms
s Specify the time in The PT value is specified and displayed in units of 1 s.
units of 1 s. The ET value is displayed in units of 1 s.
Setting range = 0 to 2147483 x seconds

Program Example
TON

(1) When the variable of the normally open instruction is turned ON, the elapsed time .ET
will increase by the specified time-based units because the TON instruction is triggered.
• The timer measurement bit .TI turns ON.
• The timer output bit .Q turns OFF.
(2) When the elapsed time .ET increases to equal the preset time .PT, the elapsed time .ET
keeps the current value.
• The timer measurement bit .TI turns OFF.
• The timer output bit .Q turns ON and allows power to pass.
(3) When start measurement is off (turned off), the elapsed time .ET will be reset to 0.
• The timer measurement bit .TI turns OFF.
• The timer output bit .Q turns OFF.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-82

Instruction Descriptions

Timing Chart for TON Instruction Operation

A B C D E

Point A The timer turns ON and the timer measurement bit .TI turns ON. The timer
measurement starts and the elapsed time .ET increases. The timer output bit .Q
remains OFF.
Point B When the elapsed time .ET equals the preset time .PT, the timer output bit .Q turns
ON. The value of the elapsed time. ET remains the same as the preset time .PT. The
timer measurement bit .TI turns OFF.
Point C The timer turns OFF and the timer output bit .Q turns OFF. The elapsed time
.ET resets to 0.
Point D The timer turns ON and the timer measurement bit .TI turns ON. The timer
measurement starts and the elapsed time .ET increases.
Point E The timer turns OFF before the elapsed time .ET reaches the preset time .PT.
While the timer output bit .Q remains OFF, the elapsed time .ET resets to 0.

Program Example
TOF

(1) When the variable for NO instructions is turned ON, the elapsed time .ET will be reset to
0 because the TON instruction is triggered.
• The timer measurement bit .TI turns OFF.
• The timer output bit .Q turns ON and allows power to pass.
(2) When the TOF instruction is triggered and the measurement start bit is turned OFF, the
elapsed time .ET will increase by the specified time-based units.
• The timer measurement bit .TI turns ON.
• The timer output bit .Q remains ON.
(3) When the elapsed time .ET increases to equal the preset time .PT, the elapsed time .ET
keeps the current value.
• The timer measurement bit .TI turns OFF.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-83

Instruction Descriptions

Timing Chart for TOF Instruction Operation

A B C D E F

Point A The timer turns ON. The timer measurement bit .TI remains OFF. The timer
output bit .Q turns ON. The elapsed time .ET resets to 0.
Point B The timer turns OFF. The timer starts measurement (.TI turns ON.) The timer
output bit remains ON.
Point C The elapsed time .ET equals the preset time .PT. The timer output bit .Q turns
OFF. The timer stops measurement (.TI turns OFF). The elapsed time .ET
remains equal to the setup time (ET = PT).
Point D The timer turns ON. The timer measurement bit .TI remains OFF. The timer
output bit .Q remains ON. The elapsed time .ET resets to 0.
Point E The timer turns OFF. The timer starts measurement (.TI turns ON.) The timer
output bit .Q remains ON.
Point F The timer turns ON before the elapsed time .ET reaches the preset time .PT,
and the timer stops measurement (.TI turns OFF). The timer output bit .Q
remains ON and the elapsed time .ET resets to 0.

Confirming Execution Results

(1) If you input a value outside the defined range, an error occurs, the error code (6706) is
written to #L_CalcErrCode, and the instruction does not execute. When troubleshooting,
always check the error code in #L_CalcErrCode.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-84

Instruction Descriptions

TP (Pulse Timer)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
TP Timer 2
(Positive Transition
Timer)

Explanation of the Pulse Timer (TP) Instruction

Timer variables used in TP instructions are structure variables. The following table lists the
internal structures.

For time-based settings, double-click the timer instruction to display the setup dialog box.

Time base Description PT value/ET value

ms Specify the time in The PT value is specified and displayed in units of ms.
units of ms. The ET value is displayed in units of ms.
0 to 2147483647 x 1 ms
10ms Specify the time in The PT value is set and displayed in units of 10 ms.
units of 10 ms. The ET value is displayed in units of 10 ms.
Setting range = 0 to 214748364 x 10 ms

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-85

Instruction Descriptions

Time base Description PT value/ET value

0.1s Specify the time in The PT value is specified and displayed in units of 0.1 s.
units of 0.1 s. The ET value is displayed in units of 0.1 s.
Setting range = 0 to 21474836 x 100 ms
s Specify the time in The PT value is specified and displayed in units of 1 s.
units of 1 s. The ET value is displayed in units of 1 s.
Setting range = 0 to 2147483 x seconds

Program example

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the TP instruction is triggered. Because the
TP instruction detects positive transitions, when the instruction is triggered, it starts the
timer no matter what condition the timer was in.
The elapsed time .ET increases by the units specified as the time base.
• The timer measurement bit .TI turns ON.
• The timer output bit .Q turns ON and allows power to pass.
(2) When the elapsed time .ET reaches the preset time, the TP instruction turns OFF.
The timer output bit .Q turns off after the preset time has elapsed, regardless of the power
flow to the left of the TP instruction.
• When PT =< ET, it is immediately reset to 0.
• When the elapsed time .ET equals the preset time .PT, the timer bit .TI is turned off.
• When the TP instruction is off, the timer output bit .Q is off.
(3) When the variable of the normally open instruction turns OFF, if the elapsed time .ET has
reached the preset time .PT, the elapsed time .ET resets to 0.
• The timer output bit .Q turns OFF.
• Otherwise, the timer continues measurement and the timer output bit .Q remains ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-86

Instruction Descriptions

Timing Chart for the TP Instruction

PT PT
A B C D E F

Point A The timer turns ON. The timer starts measurement (.TI turns ON). The timer
output bit .Q turns ON.
Point B The elapsed time .ET equals the preset time .PT. The timer output bit .Q turns
OFF. The timer stops measurement (.TI turns OFF). The elapsed time .ET
remains equal to the preset time (ET = PT).
Point C The timer turns OFF. The elapsed time .ET resets to 0.
Point D The timer turns ON. The timer starts measurement (.TI turns ON). The timer
output bit .Q turns ON.
Point E The timer turns OFF. The timer continues measurement (.TI remains ON). The
timer output bit .Q remains ON.
Point F The elapsed time .ET equals the preset time .PT. The timer output bit .Q turns
OFF. The timer stops measurement (.TI turns OFF). Because the timer input
bit IN is OFF, the elapsed time .ET resets to 0.

Confirming Execution Results

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-87

Instruction Descriptions

TONA (Accumulated ON Delay Timer) and TOFA (Accumulated OFF

Delay Timer)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
TONA Timer 2
(Accumulated ON Delay
Timer)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
TOFA Timer 2
(Accumulated OFF Delay
Timer)

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-88

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the Accumulated ON Delay Timer (TONA) and Accumulated

OFF Delay Timer (TOFA) Instructions
Timer variables in TONA and TOFA instructions are structure variables. The following table
lists the internal structures.

Timer Variable
Timer Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.TI Bit Variable Turns ON when the timer begins.
VariableName.Q Bit Variable Turns ON upon completion of the timer.
VariableName.R Bit Variable Resets the current timer. Clear (0).
VariableName.PT Integer Variable The value set on the timer
VariableName.ET Integer Variable The current value on the timer
Double-click the timer instruction to display the following dialog box. Enter the preset time
in this dialog box.
Enter the timer value and units.

For time-based settings, double-click the timer instruction to display the setup dialog box.
Time base Description PT value/ET value
ms Specify the time in The PT value is specified and displayed in units of ms.
units of ms. The ET value is displayed in units of ms.
Setting range = 0 to 2147483647 x 1 ms
10ms Specify the time in The PT value is set and displayed in units of 10 ms.
units of 10 ms. The ET value is displayed in units of 10 ms.
Setting range = 0 to 214748364 x 10 ms
0.1s Specify the time in The PT value is specified and displayed in units of 0.1 s.
units of 0.1 s. The ET value is displayed in units of 0.1 s.
Setting range = 0 to 21474836 x 100 ms
s Specify the time in The PT value is specified and displayed in units of 1 s.
units of 1 s. The ET value is displayed in units of 1 s.
Setting range = 0 to 2147483 x seconds

Program Example

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-89

Instruction Descriptions

TONA

(1) When the variable of the normally open instruction is turned ON, the elapsed time .ET
will increase by the specified time-based units because the TONA instruction is triggered.
• The timer measurement bit .TI turns ON.
• The timer output bit .Q turns OFF.
(2) When the elapsed time .ET increases to equal the preset time .PT, the elapsed time .ET
keeps the current value.
• The timer measurement bit .TI turns OFF.
• The timer output bit .Q turns ON and allows power to pass.
(3) When the TONA instruction turns OFF, the elapsed time .ET keeps the current value.
• The timer measurement bit .TI turns OFF.
• The timer output bit .Q turns OFF.
(4) The TONA instruction acts like an accumulator and increases its value. Set the R coil ON
to reset the current value.
Timing Chart for the TONA Instruction

PT A PT B Q PT A

A B C D E F G

Points A, F The timer input bit IN turns ON and the timer measurement bit TI turns ON.
The timer starts and the elapsed time ET increases. The timer output bit Q
remains OFF.
Points B, G The timer input bit IN turns OFF, and if the elapsed time ET is less than the
preset time PT, the timer output bit Q remains OFF. The elapsed time ET is in
the keep state.
Point C The timer input bit IN turns ON and the timer measurement bit TI turns ON.
The timer measurement starts again and the elapsed time ET is added to the
kept value. The timer output bit Q remains OFF.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-90

Instruction Descriptions

Point D When the elapsed time ET reaches the preset time PT, the timer measurement
bit TI turns OFF.
The timer output bit Q turns ON.
Point E The timer input bit IN turns OFF and the timer output bit Q turns OFF. Reset
the elapsed time ET to zero using the reset bit (R).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-91

Instruction Descriptions

Operational Example of the TOFA Instruction

(1) When the timer turns OFF, because the TOFA instruction is triggered, the elapsed time
.ET increases in the specified time-based units.
• The timer measurement bit .TI turns ON.
• The timer output bit .Q turns OFF.
(2) When the elapsed time .ET increases to equal the preset time .PT, the elapsed time .ET
keeps the current value.
• The timer measurement bit .TI turns OFF.
• The timer output bit .Q turns ON and allows power to pass.
(3) When the TONA instruction turns OFF, the elapsed time .ET keeps the current value.
• The timer measurement bit .TI turns OFF.
• The timer output bit .Q turns OFF.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-92

Instruction Descriptions

Timing Chart for the TOFA Instruction

PT PT PT

A B C D E F G H I J K L M

Point A When IN (input) turns ON, Q (output) turns ON.

Point B When IN (input) is OFF, TI (timer measurement) turns ON. When TI turns
ON, the timer measurement starts.
Point C When IN (input) turns ON, the timer measurement pauses.
Point D When IN (input) turns OFF, the paused timer measurement continues.
Point E When the preset time (PT) value has increased to the point that PT equals ET,
TI (timer measurement) and Q (output) turn OFF.
Points F, G Even if IN (input) turns either on or off, Q (output) and TI (timer) do not turn on.
Point H Turning ON R resets the timer. The timer is reset when an upward transition is
detected.
Point I When IN (input) turns ON, Q (output) turns ON.
Point J When R (reset) turns on, Q (output) and TI (timer) are reset. The timer current
value ET is also reset and cleared to 0.
Point K When IN (input) turns ON, Q (output) turns ON.
Point L When IN (input) turns OFF, TI (timer measurement) turns ON. When TI turns
ON, the timer measurement starts.
Point M When the timer setting (PT) value has increased so that PT equals ET, TI (timer
measurement) and Q (output) turn OFF.

(1) If any numeric value out of the setting range is input, an error will occur and the “6706”
error code will be set for #L_CalcErrCode. For checking error details, refer to the
#L_CalcErrCode. If any value out of the setting range is input, the instruction is not
executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-93

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.5 Counter Instruction

CTU and CTUP (Up Counter)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
CTU HP Counter 2
(Up Counter -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
CTUP HP Counter 2
(Up Counter -
positive transition)

Explanation of the CTU and CTUP Instructions

Counter variables in CTU and CTUP instructions are structure variables. The following table
lists the internal structures.

Counter Variable
Counter Variable Variables Settings Description
Variable name.R Bit Variable Resets the current value. Clear (0).
Variable name.Q Bit Variable Turns ON when the current value reaches the
preset value.
Variable name.UP Bit Variable Counts up when the variable is ON.
Variable name.QU Bit Variable For Up/Down counters, turns ON when the
current value reaches the preset value.
Variable name.QD Bit Variable For Up/Down counters, turns ON when the
current value reaches 0 or less.
Variable name.PV Integer Variable Preset value
Variable name.CV Integer Variable Current value
When CTU and CTUP instructions are executed, if the counter reset bit variable .R is OFF,
regardless of the preset value .PV, the current value .CV will increase by 1. When the current
value .CV equals the preset value .PV, the counter output bit variable .Q turns ON. When the
counter reset bit variable .R is ON, the current value .CV is reset to 0 and the counter output
bit variable .Q also turns OFF.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-94

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
CTU
In the following example, if five operation errors are counted within 1 minute, an error will
be displayed.
In the program example, the timer instruction is not shown. Only the one-minute timer start
trigger for timer start is shown.
To count operation errors, create a separate error input trigger.

(1) When the normally open instruction of the one-minute timer turns ON, the OUT
instruction assigned to counter .R (reset) turns ON.
When the operation error counter .R (reset) turns ON, the operation error counter .CV of
the CTU instruction is cleared to zero.
(2) When the positive transition normally open instruction in rung 3 turns ON, the operation
error counter .CV value (current value) increases by 1.
(3) When the operation error counter .CV value (current value) equals the .PV value (preset
value), the operation error counter .Q of the CTU instruction turns ON , and the OUT
instruction in rung 4 outputs the error detection message.

Program Example
CTUP

The difference between CTU and CTUP instructions is whether the .CV value increases as a
level counter, or as a positive transition counter.
The difference in program creation is that the positive transition normally open instruction
located on rung 3 to detect operation errors is a normally open instruction.
There is no difference in operation other than how the input is determined.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-95

Instruction Descriptions

CTD and CTDP (Down Counters)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
CTD HP Counter 2
(Down Counter -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
CTDP HP Counter 2
(Down Counter -
positive transition)

Explanation of the CTD and CTDP Instructions

Counter variables in CTD and CTDP instructions are structure variables. The following table
lists the internal structures.

Counter Variable
Counter Variable Variables Settings Description
Variable name.R Bit Variable Resets the current value. Clear (0).
Variable name.Q Bit Variable Turns ON when the current value reaches the
preset value.
Variable name.UP Bit Variable Counts up when the variable is ON.
Variable name.QU Bit Variable For Up/Down counters, turns ON when the
current value reaches the preset value.
Variable name.QD Bit Variable For Up/Down counters, turns ON when the
current value reaches 0 or less.
Variable name.PV Integer Variable Preset value
Variable name.CV Integer Variable Current value
When the CDT and CDTP instructions are ON, if the counter reset bit variable .R is OFF, the
current value .CV will decrease by 1.
When the current value .CV is less than 0, the counter output bit .Q turns ON. When the
counter reset bit variable .R turns ON, the preset value .PV is copied to the current value
variable .CV. And, the counter output variable .Q turns OFF.

• When the preset value of the down counter is set to zero or less, output
continues to remain on. Be sure to set the preset value to 1 or more.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-96

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
CDT
In the following example, if five operation errors are counted within 1 minute, an error will
be displayed.
In the program example, the timer instruction is not shown. Only the one-minute timer start
trigger for timer start is shown.
To count operation errors, create a separate error input trigger.

(1) When the normally open instruction of the one-minute timer turns ON, the OUT
instruction assigned to counter .R (reset) turns ON.
When the operation error counter .R (reset) turns ON, the CDT instruction's preset value
.PV is copied to the current value .CV. In the program example, 5 is copied to the current
value .CV.
(2) When the positive transition normally open instruction turns ON, the operation error
counter .CV value (current value) decreases by 1.
(3) When the value of the operation error counter .CV value (current value) is 0 or less, the
operation error counter .Q of the CDT instruction turns ON, and the OUT instruction in
rung 4 outputs the error detection message.

Program Example
CTDP

The difference between CTD and CTDP instructions is one counts down when it detects a
level change and the other counts down when it detects a positive transition.
The difference in program creation is that the positive transition normally open instruction
located on rung 3 to detect operation errors is a normally open instruction.
There is no difference in operation other than how the input is determined.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-97

Instruction Descriptions

CTUD and CTUDP (Up/Down Counters)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
CTUD HP Counter 2
(Up/Down Counter -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
CTUDP HP Counter 2
(Up/Down counter -
positive transition)

Explanation of the CTUD and CTUDP Instructions

Counter variables in CTUD and CTUDP instructions are structure variables. The following
table lists the internal structures.

Counter Variable
Counter Variable Variables Settings Description
Variable name.R Bit Variable Resets the current value. Clear (0).
Variable name.Q Bit Variable Turns ON when the current value reaches the
preset value.
Variable name.UP Bit Variable Counts up when the variable is ON.
Variable name.QU Bit Variable For Up/Down counters, turns ON when the
current value reaches the preset value.
Variable name.QD Bit Variable For Up/Down counters, turns ON when the
current value reaches 0 or less.
Variable name.PV Integer Variable Preset value
Variable name.CV Integer Variable Current value
When the .UP bit of CTUD and CTUDP instructions is ON, they operate the same as CTU
instructions. When the .UP bit is OFF, CTUD and CTUDP instructions operate the same as
CTD instructions.
When .UP is ON (counts up) and if .CV (current value) is larger than .PV (preset value), .Q
turns ON when the current value reaches the preset value and .QU turns ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-98

Instruction Descriptions

When .UP is OFF (counts down) is OFF and .CV (current value) is 0 or less, then .Q turns
ON when the current value reaches the preset value and .QD turns ON.

Program Example
CTUD
In the following example, if five operation errors are counted within 1 minute, an error will
be displayed.
In the program example, the timer instruction is not shown. Only the one-minute timer start
trigger for timer start is shown.
To count operation errors, create a separate error input trigger.

(1) When the normally open instruction of the one-minute timer turns ON, the OUT
instruction assigned to counter .R (reset) turns ON.
When the operation error counter .R (reset) turns ON, if .UP is ON, the CTU instruction is
executed, and .CV (current value) is cleared to zero. If .UP is OFF, the CTD instruction is
executed, and .PV (preset value) is copied to .CV (current value).
(2) When the positive transition normally open instruction in rung 3 turns ON, and if .UP is
ON, the .CV value increases by 1. If .UP is OFF, the .CV value (current value) decreases
by 1.
(3) When .UP is ON, and the .PV value (preset value) and the .CV value become equal, .Q
and .QU turn ON. When .UP is OFF, and the .CV value (current value) is less than 0, Q
and .QD turn ON.
(4) The operation error counter .Q of the CTUD instruction (turns ON when the current value
reaches the preset value) turns ON and the OUT instruction outputs the error detection
message.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-99

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
CTUDP

The difference between CTUD and CTUDP instructions is whether the .CV value increases
or decreases as a level counter, or as a positive transition counter. The difference in program
creation is that a positive transition normally open instruction located on rung 3 to detect
operation errors is a normally open instruction. There is no difference in operation other than
how the input is determined.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-100

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.6 R/W Instructions

JRD and JRDP (Time Read)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
JRD Read 2
(Time Read -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
JRDP Read 2
(Time Read -
positive transition)

Explanation of the JRD and JRDP Instructions

Time variables in JRD and JRDP instructions are structure variables. The following table
lists the internal structures.

Time Variable
Time Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.HR Integer Variable Hours are input in BCD.
VariableName.MIN Integer Variable Minutes are input in BCD.
VariableName.SEC Integer Variable Seconds are input in BCD.
When JRD and JRDP instructions receive power, the current time will be stored in the
variable in D1. The stored time variable can be extracted into hours, minutes and seconds by
specifying the structure element. When the time 12:10:45 is stored in the time variable D1,
the .HR time is 12, the .MIN time is 10, and the .SEC time is 45.

Confirming Execution Results

(1) If you input a value outside the defined range, an error occurs and the error code (6706) is
written to #L_CalcErrCode. When troubleshooting, always check the error code in
#L_CalcErrCode.
(2) #L_CalcZero turns on when the value of D1 is 00:00:00.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-101

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
JRD
Stores the current time in the time variable.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, a JRD instruction will execute. When
the JRD instruction is executed, the current time is stored in D1.

Program Example
JRDP

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the JRDP instruction will execute. When
the JRDP instruction is executed, the current time is stored in D1.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-102

Instruction Descriptions

JSET and JSETP (Time Set)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
JSET Settings 6
(Time Set -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
JSETP Settings 6
(Time Set
positive transition)

Explanation of the JSET and JSETP Instructions

Time variables used in JSET and JSETP instructions are structure variables. The following
table lists the internal structures.

Time Variable
Time Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.HR Integer Variable Hours are input in BCD.
VariableName.MIN Integer Variable Minutes are input in BCD.
VariableName.SEC Integer Variable Seconds are input in BCD.
When JSET and JSETP instructions receive power, the specified time will be stored in the
time variable. To set the time, use JSET and JSETP instructions. The time variable in D1 can
be extracted into hours, minutes, and seconds by specifying structure elements.
When the current time 12:10:45 is stored in D1, the values 12, 10, and 45 are stored in .HR,
.MIN and .SEC, respectively.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-103

Instruction Descriptions

Time Set Dialog Box

Double-click JSET and JSETP instructions to display a dialog box for setting the time.

In the above dialog box, specify the desired time in hours, minutes and seconds.
Setting Range
Hour 0 - 23
Minute 0 - 59
Second 0 - 59
Confirming Execution Results
(1) If you input a value outside the defined range, an error occurs and the error code (6706) is
written to #L_CalcErrCode. When troubleshooting, always check the error code in
#L_CalcErrCode.
(2) #L_CalcZero turns on when the value of D1 is 00:00:00.

Program Example
JSET
Stores the defined time in the time variable.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the JSET instruction will execute.
When the JSET instruction executes, the defined time 17:30:01 is stored in the time
variable in D1.

Program Example
JSETP

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-104

Instruction Descriptions

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the JSETP instruction will execute. When
the JSETP instruction executed, the defined time 17:30:00 is stored in the time variable in
D1.

NRD and NRDP (Date Read)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
NRD Read 2
(Date Read -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
NRDP Read 2
(Date Read -
positive transition)

Explanation of the NRD and NRDP Instructions

The date variables used in the NRD and NRDP instructions are structure variables. The
following table lists the internal structures.

Date Variable
Date Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.YR Integer Variable The year is input in BCD.
VariableName.MO Integer Variable The month is input in BCD.
Variable name DAY Integer Variable The day is input in BCD.
When NRD and NRDP instructions receive power, the current time is stored in D1. You can
extract the year/month/date of the date variable by specifying a particular date element.
When the current date 2005/10/20 is stored in D1, 05, 10, and 20 are stored in .YR, .MO, and
.DAY, respectively.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-105

Instruction Descriptions

Confirming Execution Results

(1) If any numeric value out of the setting range is input, an error will occur and the “6706”
error code is set for #L_CalcErrCode. For checking error details, refer to the
#L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
NRD
Stores the current date in the date variable.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the NRD instruction is executed. When
the NRD instruction is executed, the current date is stored in the date variable in D1.

Program Example
NRDP

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the NRDP instruction will be executed.
When the NRDP instruction is executed, the current date is stored in the date variable in
D1.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-106

Instruction Descriptions

NSET and NSETP (Date Set)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
NSET Settings 5
(Date Set -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
NSETP Settings 5
(Date Set -
positive transition)

Explanation of the NSET and NSETP Instructions

The date variables used in the NSET and NSETP instructions are structure variables. The
following table lists the internal structures.

Date Variable
Date Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.YR Integer Variable The year is input in BCD.
VariableName.MO Integer Variable The month is input in BCD.
VariableName.DAY Integer Variable The day is input in BCD.
When the NSET and NSETP instructions receive power, the specified date will be stored in
the date variable. To set the date, use NSET and NSETP instructions. The date variable in D1
can be extracted into hours, minutes, and seconds by specifying structure elements.
When the date 2005/10/20 specified in the JSET instruction is stored in D1, 05, 10, and 20
are stored in .YR, .MO, and .DAY, respectively.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-107

Instruction Descriptions

Date Set Dialog Box

Double-click the NSET and NSETP instructions to display the dialog box for setting the date.

In the above dialog box, enter the desired date in years, months and days.
Setting Range
Year 0 - 99
Month 1 - 12
Day 1 - 31 (The range depends on the month. Leap
years can be specified. Example: February 2008 has 29 days.)
Confirming Execution Results
(1) If any numeric value out of the setting range is input, an error will occur and the “6706”
error code is set for #L_CalcErrCode. For checking error details, refer to the
#L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
NSET
Stores the setup date in the date variable.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the NSET instruction will be executed.
When the NSET instruction is executed, the date 10 (month) 20 (day), 2005 specified in
the dialog box is stored in the date variable in D1.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-108

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
NSETP

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the NSETP instruction will be executed.
When the NSETP instruction is executed, the date 10 (month) 20 (day), 2005 specified in
the dialog box is stored in the date variable in D1.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-109

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.7 Operation (Arithmetic)

ADD and ADDP (Add)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of Steps
Name
ADD Operation 4 to 13
(Add -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of Steps

Name
ADDP Operation 4 to 13
(Add -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands (S1, S2, and D1) for the ADD
and ADDP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the ADD and ADDP instructions depends on how operand
values are specified. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 +1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

For example, Converting the number of steps in ADD and ADDP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Data_2 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [Specify indirectly] = 3 steps} + {1

steps} = 7 steps.
The last 1 step is for the instruction. Make sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-110

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1) and (S2) in the ADD and
ADDP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-111

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ 1 O
Format Specify float 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify float 3 O
variable[variable]
Real ⎯ 1 O
Specify real variable 2 O
[constant]
Specify real variable 3 O
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT / .ET only 2 O
C_ .PV / .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR / .MO / .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR / .MIN / .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / .ST 2 O
only
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-112

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Constant Integer −2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ± 1.175494351e − 38 to 1 O
± 3.402823466e + 38
Real ± 2.2250738585072014e−308 2 O
to
± 1.7976931348623158e+308

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the ADD and ADDP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-113

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(only output) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer 3 O
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer 4 O
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ 1 O
Specify float 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify float 3 O
variable[variable]
Real ⎯ 1 O
Specify real variable 2 O
[constant]
Specify real variable 3 O
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / 2 O
.ST only
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-114

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT / .ET only 2 O
C_ .PV / .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR / .MO / .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR / .MIN / .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / 2 O
.ST only
Constant ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ X

Explanation of the ADD and ADDP Instructions

The ADD and ADDP instructions are add instructions. When an ADD instruction is
executed, S1 will be added to S2 and the result is stored in D1.
The ADD and ADDP instructions always pass power. When using ADD and ADDP
instructions, if variables specified in operands S1, S2, and D1 are not the same type, an error
will occur. Specify the same variable type in operands S1, S2, and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer constant 20
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

When operand D1 is an integer variable and you want to input hexadecimal values in
operands S1 and S2.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-115

Instruction Descriptions

When 0x (zero and lower case "x") is input, the following values will be interpreted as
hexadecimal values.

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF

Operand S2 Integer constant 0xFE
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values will become float values.

Operand S1 Float constant 0.11

Operand S2 Float constant 0.12
Operand D1 Float variable OUT3

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values will become real values.

Operand S1 Real constant 0.11

Operand S2 Real constant 0.12
Operand D1 Real constant OUT4

When adding the specified array data (integer variable array), specify the array using data [0]
or data [N] (N indicates an integer variable).
When all operands S1, S2, and D1 specify the entire array, an error will occur even if the
specified variables are the same type.
Data_1 Array size = 5
Data_2 Array size = 5
Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram
results in an error.

Data_1[0] Array size = 5

Data_2[0] Array size = 5
Result[n] Array size = 5
Arithmetic operations are performed only on
individually specified arrays.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-116

Instruction Descriptions

Confirming Execution Results

(1) If an overflow occurs as a result of the instruction, the system variable (bit) #L_CalcCarry
turns on.
(2) The instruction will not execute if the value in operand S1 or S2 (infinite or non-numeric
value) cannot be recognized. The error code (6706) is written to #L_CalcErrCode. The
result in D1 maintains the value from the previous successfully run instruction.
(3) #L_Error turns on, and the error code (6706) is written to #L_CalcErrCode.
(4) When the result is 0, the system variable #L_CalcZero turns ON.

(Notes)
When checking the result using system variables, make sure the check takes place after the
instruction has been executed.
When checking the state after multiple instructions have been executed, system variables will
store the result only of the last processed instruction.

Program Example
ADD
Adds one constant to another and stores the result in the integer variable.

(1) When the positive transition instruction in the operation turns ON, the ADD instruction
will be executed. When the ADD instruction is executed, the result value of 40, obtained
from 25 +15 = 40, is stored in D1.
When the operation is a normally open instruction, as long as the variable is ON, the ADD
instruction is always executed.

Program Example
ADDP

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-117

Instruction Descriptions

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the ADDP instruction will be executed.
When the ADDP instruction is executed, the result value of 40, obtained from 25 +15 =
40, is stored in D1.
Even when the operation is a normally open instruction, only when the upward transition
is detected, will the ADDP instruction execute.
Therefore, even when the variable of the normally open instruction is always ON, the
ADDP instruction is executed only for one scan.

SUB and SUBP (Subtract)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
SUB Operation 4 to 13
(Subtract -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
SUBP Operation 4 to 13
(Subtract -
positive transition)

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-118

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of the (S1, S2, and D1) operands for the SUB
and SUBP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the SUB and SUBP instructions depends on the specified
operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

For example, Converting the number of steps in SUB and SUBP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Data_2 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [Specify indirectly] = 3 steps} + {1

steps} = 7 steps.
The last 1 step is for the instruction. Make sure to add 1 step.

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1) and (S2) in the SUB and
SUBP instructions
.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-119

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer 3 O
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer 4 O
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real ⎯ 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / .ST 2 O
only
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-120

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT / .ET only 2 O
C_ .PV / .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR / .MO / .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR / .MIN / .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer −2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ± 1.175494351e − 38 to 1 O
± 3.402823466e + 38
Real ± 2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
± 1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-121

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the SUB and SUBP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-122

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ 1 O
Format Specify float 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify float 3 O
variable[variable]
Real ⎯ 1 O
Specify real variable 2 O
[constant]
Specify real variable 3 O
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / 2 O
.ST only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT / .ET only 2 O
C_ .PV / .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR / .MO / .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR / .MIN / .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / 2 O
.ST only
Constant ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ X

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-123

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the SUB and SUBP Instructions

The SUB and SUBP instructions are subtraction instructions. When a SUB instruction is
executed, S1 will be subtracted from S2 and the result is stored in D1.
The SUB and SUBP instructions always pass power. When using SUB and SUBP
instructions, if the types of variables specified in operands S1, S2, and D1 are not the same,
an error will occur. Specify the same variable type for operands S1, S2, and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer constant 20
Operand D1 Integer constant OUT1

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF

Operand S2 Integer constant 0xFE
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values will become float values.

Operand S1 Float constant 0.11

Operand S2 Float constant 0.12
Operand D1 Float variable OUT3

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values will become real values.

Operand S1 Real constant 0.11

Operand S2 Real constant 0.12
Operand D1 Real variable OUT4

When subtracting specified array data (integer variable array) Specify the array using data
[0] or data [N] (N indicates an integer variable).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-124

Instruction Descriptions

When all operands S1, S2, and D1 specify the entire array, an error will occur even if the
specified variables are the same type.

Data_1 Array size = 5

Data_2 Array size = 5
Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram
results in an error.
Data_1[0] Array size = 5
Data_2[0] Array size = 5
Result[n] Array size = 5
Arithmetic operations are performed only on
individually specified arrays.

Confirming Execution Results

(1) If an overflow occurs as a result of the instruction, the system variable (bit) #L_CalcCarry
turns on.
(2) The instruction will not execute if the value in operand S1 or S2 (infinite or non-numeric
value) cannot be recognized. For the error check, the error code “6706” is set for the
#L_CalcErrCode.
The output result D1 maintains the value from the previous instruction executed
successfully.
(3) #L_Error turns on, and the error code (6706) is written to #L_CalcErrCode.
(4) When the result is 0, the system variable #L_CalcZero turns ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-125

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
SUB
Subtracts one constant from another and stores the result in the integer variable.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the SUB instruction will be executed.
When the SUB instruction is executed, the result value of 10, obtained from 25 - 15 = 10,
is stored in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, as long as the variable is ON, the SUB
instruction is always executed.

Program Example
SUBP

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the SUBP instruction will be executed.
When the SUBP instruction is executed, the result value of 10, obtained from 25 - 15 =
10, is stored in D1.
Even when using a normally open instruction, only the upward transition is detected, and
the SUBP instruction is executed.
Therefore, even when the normally open instruction is always ON, the SUBP instruction
is executed only for one scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-126

Instruction Descriptions

MUL and MULP (Multiplication)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
MUL Operation 4 to 13
(Multiplication -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
MULP Operation 4 to 13
(Multiplication -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of the (S1, S2, and D1) operands for the
MUL and MULP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the MUL and MULP instructions depends on the specified
operands. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

For example, Converting the number of steps in MUL and MULP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Data_2 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [Specify indirectly] = 3 steps} + {1

steps} = 7 steps.
The last 1 step is for the instruction. Make sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-127

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1) and (S2) in the MUL and
MULP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-128

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ 1 O
Format Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real ⎯ 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT / .ET only 2 O
C_ .PV / .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR / .MO / .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR / .MIN / .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer −2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ± 1.175494351e − 38 to 1 O
± 3.402823466e + 38
Real ± 2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
± 1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-129

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the MUL and MULP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-130

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ 1 O
Format Specify float 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify float 3 O
variable[variable]
Real ⎯ 1 O
Specify real variable 2 O
[constant]
Specify real variable 3 O
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / 2 O
.ST only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT / .ET only 2 O
C_ .PV / .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR / .MO / .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR / .MIN / .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / 2 O
.ST only
Constant ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ X

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-131

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the MUL and MULP Instructions

The MUL and MULP instructions are multiplication instructions. When a MUL instruction is
executed, S1 will be multiplied by S2 and the result is stored in D1.
The MUL and MULP instructions always pass power. When using MUL and MULP
instructions, if the types of variables specified in operands S1, S2, and D1 are not the same,
an error will occur. Specify the same variable type for operands S1, S2, and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer constant 20
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF

Operand S2 Integer constant 0xFE
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values will become float values.

Operand S1 Float constant 0.11

Operand S2 Float constant 0.12
Operand D1 Float variable OUT3

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values will become real values.

Operand S1 Real constant 0.11

Operand S2 Real constant 0.12
Operand D1 Real constant OUT4

When multiplying the specified array data (integer variable array) Specify the array using data
[0] or data [N] (N indicates an integer variable).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-132

Instruction Descriptions

When all operands S1, S2, and D1 specify the entire array, an error will occur even if the
specified variables are the same type.

Data_1 Array size = 5

Confirming Execution Results

(1) If an overflow occurs as a result of the instruction, the system variable (bit) #L_CalcCarry
turns on.
(2) The instruction will not execute if the value in operand S1 or S2 (infinite or non-numeric
value) cannot be recognized. For the error check, the error code “6706” is set for the
#L_CalcErrCode.
The output result D1 maintains the value from the previous instruction executed
successfully.
(3) #L_Error turns on, and the error code (6706) is written to #L_CalcErrCode.
(4) When the execution result is 0, the system variable #L_CalcZero turns ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-133

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
MUL
Multiplies one constant by another and stores the result in the integer variable.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the MUL instruction will be executed.
When the MUL instruction is executed, the result value 375, obtained from 25 × 15 = 375,
is stored in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, as long as the instruction variable is ON, the
MUL instruction is always executed.

Program Example
MULP

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the MULP instruction will be executed.
When the MULP instruction is executed, the result value of 10, obtained from 25 × 15 =
375, is stored in D1.
Even when using a normally open instruction, the MULP instruction executes only when
it detects the upward transition. Therefore, even when the variable of the NO instruction
is always ON, the MULP instruction is executed only for one scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-134

Instruction Descriptions

DIV and DIVP (Division)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
DIV Operation 4 to 13
(Division -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
DIVP Operation 4 to 13
(Division -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of the (S1, S2, and D1) operands for DIV and
DIVP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the DIV and DIVP instructions depends on the specified
operands. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 +1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in DIV and DIVP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Data_2 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [Specify indirectly] = 3 steps} + {1

steps} = 7 steps.
The last 1 step is for the instruction. Make sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-135

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1) and (S2) in the DIV and
DIVP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-136

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-137

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the DIV and DIVP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-138

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ 1 O
Format Specify float 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify float 3 O
variable[variable]
Real ⎯ 1 O
Specify real variable 2 O
[constant]
Specify real variable 3 O
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / 2 O
.ST only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT / .ET only 2 O
C_ .PV / .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR / .MO / .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR / .MIN / .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / 2 O
.ST only
Constant ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ X

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-139

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the DIV and DIVP Instructions

The DIV and DIVP instructions are division instructions. When a DIV instruction is
executed, S1 will be divided by S2 and the result is stored in D1.
The DIV and DIVP instructions always pass power. When using the DIV and DIVP
instructions, if the types of variables specified in operands S1, S2, and D1 are not the same,
an error occurs. Specify the same variable type for operands S1, S2, and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10
Operand S2 Integer constant 3
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1
The operation result is rounded off to the nearest
integer.

When operand D1 is an integer variable and you want to input hexadecimal values in
operands S1 and S2.
When 0x (zero and lower case "x") is input, the following values will be interpreted as
hexadecimal values.
Operand S1 Integer constant 0xA
Operand S2 Integer constant 0x3
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2
The operation result is rounded off to the nearest
integer.
Example: 0xA (S1) / 0x3 (S2) = 3 (D1)

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values will become float values.
Operand S1 Float constant 150
Operand S2 Float constant 0.8
Operand D1 Float variable OUT3
The operation result is a value including the decimal
point.
Example: 0f 15.0 (S1) / 0f 0.8 (S2) = 18.75 (D1)

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-140

Instruction Descriptions

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values will become real values.
Operand S1 Float constant 150
Operand S2 Float constant 0.8
D1 Operand Float variable OUT4
The operation result is a value including the decimal
point.
For example 0r15.0 (S1) / 0r0.8 (S2) = 18.75 (D1)

When dividing specified array data (integer variable array) Specify the array using data [0] or
data [N] (N indicates an integer variable).
When all operands S1, S2, and D1 specify the entire array, an error will occur even if the
specified variables are the same type.

Data_1 Array size = 5

Data_2 Array size = 5
Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results in
an error.

Data_1[0] Array size = 5

Data_2[0] Array size = 5
Result[n] Array size = 5
Arithmetic operations are performed only on
individually specified arrays.

Confirming Execution Results

(1) If an overflow occurs as a result of the instruction, the system variable (bit) #L_CalcCarry
turns on.
(2) The instruction will not execute if the value in operand S1 or S2 (infinite or non-numeric
value) cannot be recognized. For the error check, the error code “6706” is set for the
#L_CalcErrCode.
The output result D1 maintains the value from the previous instruction executed
successfully.
(3) #L_Error turns on, and the error code (6706) is written to #L_CalcErrCode.
(4) When the execution result is 0, the system variable #L_CalcZero turns ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-141

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
DIV
Divides one constant by another and stores the result in the float variable.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the DIV instruction will be executed.
When the DIV instruction is executed, the result value of 1.66666..., obtained from 25/15
= 1.66666..., is stored in the result data (float variable) in D1. When the value cannot be
divided, it is rounded off to the nearest digit.
When using a normally open instruction, as long as the variable for the instruction is ON,
the DIV instruction is always executed.

Program Example
DIVP

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the DIVP instruction will be executed.
When the DIVP instruction is executed, the result value of 1.66666..., obtained from 25 /
15 = 1.66666..., is stored in the result data (float variable) in D1. When the value cannot
be divided, it is rounded off to the nearest digit.
Even when using a normally open instruction, only the upward transition is detected, and
the DIVP instruction is executed.
Therefore, even when the instruction is always ON, the DIVP instruction is executed only
for one scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-142

Instruction Descriptions

MOD and MODP (Modules)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
MOD Operation 4 to 13
(Modules -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
MODP Operation 4 to 13
(Modules -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands (S1, S2, and D1) for the MOD
and MODP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the MOD and MODP instructions depends on the specified
operands. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 +1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in MOD and MODP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Data_2 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [Specify indirectly] = 3 steps} + {1

steps} = 7 steps.
The last 1 step is for the instruction. Make sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-143

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1) and (S2) in the MOD and
MODP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-144

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT / .ET only 2 O
C_ .PV / .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR / .MO / .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR / .MIN / .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer −2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ± 1.175494351e − 38 to ⎯
X
± 3.402823466e + 38
Real ± 2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯
X
± 1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-145

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the MOD and MODP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-146

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify float ⎯
X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯
X
variable[variable]
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable ⎯
X
[constant]
Specify real variable ⎯
X
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / 2 O
.ST only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT / .ET only 2 O
C_ .PV / .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR / .MO / .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR / .MIN / .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / 2 O
.ST only
Constant ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ X

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-147

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the MOD and MODP Instructions

The MOD and MODP instructions are modules operations. When a MOD instruction is
executed, S1 will be divided by S2 and the value of the remainder is stored in D1. The MOD
and MODP instructions are always conducted. When using the MOD and MODP
instructions, if the types of variables specified in operands S1, S2, and D1 are not the same,
an error will occur. Specify the same variable type for operands S1, S2, and D1. Refer to the
following when specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer constant 3
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1
Example: 10 (S1) / 3 (S2) = 3 Remainder 1

When operand D1 is an integer variable and you want to input hexadecimal values in
operands S1 and S2.
When 0x (zero and lower case "x") is input, the following values will be interpreted as
hexadecimal values.
Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF
Operand S2 Integer constant 0xFE
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2
Example: 10 (S1) / 3 (S2) = 3 Remainder 1
Therefore, D1 = 1

When performing a module operation for specified array data (integer variable array) Specify
an array using data [0] or data [N] (N indicates an integer variable).
When all operands S1, S2, and D1 specify the entire array, an error will occur even if the
specified variables are the same type.

Data_1 Array size = 5

Data_2 Array size = 5
Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results in
an error.

Data_1[0] Array size = 5

Data_2[0] Array size = 5
Result[n] Array size = 5
Arithmetic operations are performed only on
individually specified arrays.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-148

Instruction Descriptions

Confirming Execution Results

(1) If an overflow occurs as a result of the instruction, the system variable (bit) #L_CalcCarry
turns on.
(2) #L_Error turns on, and the error code (6706) is written to #L_CalcErrCode.
(3) When the execution result is 0, the system variable #L_CalcZero turns ON.

Program Example
MOD
Performs modules operation on two constants and stores the result in the integer variable.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the MOD instruction will be executed.
When the MOD instruction is executed, the result value of 10, obtained from 25/15 = 1
(remainder 10), is stored in D1. When using a normally open instruction, as long as the
operation is ON, the MOD instruction is always executed.

Program Example
MODP

(1) When the normally open instruction start turns ON, the MODP instruction will be
executed. When the MODP instruction is executed, the result value of 10, obtained from
25 / 15 = 1 (remainder 10), is stored in D1.
Even when using a normally open instruction, the MODP instruction executes only when
it detects the upward transition. Therefore, even when the NO instruction is always ON,
the MODP instruction is executed only for one scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-149

Instruction Descriptions

INC and INCP (Increment)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
INC Operation 2 to 4
(Increment -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
INCP Operation 2 to 4
(Increment -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the INC and INCP
instructions.
Name Type Condition Instruction Possible: O
Step Count Not
Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 2 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 2 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 2 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-150

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Instruction Possible: O

Step Count Not
Possible: X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 2 O
(output only) specified
Specify integer 3 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 4 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯
variable[constant/variable] X
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 3 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 3 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 3 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 3 O
PID .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / .ST 3 O
only
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-151

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Instruction Possible: O

Step Count Not
Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT / .ET only 3 O
C_ .PV / .CV only 3 O
N_ .YR / .MO / .DAY only 3 O
J_ .HR / .MIN / .SEC only 3 O
U_ .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / .ST 3 O
only
Constant Integer −2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ± 1.175494351e − 38 to ⎯
X
± 3.402823466e + 38
Real ± 2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯
X
± 1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-152

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the INC and INCP Instructions

The INC and INCP instructions are incremental instructions. When an INC instruction is
executed, 1 is added to D1.
The INC and INCP instructions always pass power.

Confirming Execution Results

(1) If an overflow occurs as a result of the instruction, the system variable (bit) #L_CalcCarry
turns on.
(2) When the execution result is 0, the system variable #L_CalcZero turns ON.

Program Example
INC
Every time the INC instruction turns on, 1 is added.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns on, it passes power and the INC instruction
adds 1 to the result data D1 (integer variable). When using a normally open instruction, as
long as the instruction is passing power, the INC instruction continually executes adding 1
at each scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-153

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
INCP

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the INCP instruction will be executed.
When the INCP instruction is executed, 1 is added to the result data (integer variable) in
D1.
Even when using a normally open instruction, the INCP instruction executes only when it
detects the upward transition.Therefore, even when the instruction is always ON, the
INCP instruction is executed only for one scan and 1 is added to the result data (integer
variable).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-154

Instruction Descriptions

DEC and DECP (Decrement)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
DEC Operation 2 to 4
(Decrement -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
DECP Operation 2 to 4
(Decrement -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the DEC and DECP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Instruction Possible: O

Step Count Not
Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 2 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 2 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 2 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-155

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Instruction Possible: O

Step Count Not
Possible: X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 2
(output only) specified O

Specify integer 3
O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 4
O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯
variable[constant/variable] X
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 3 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 3 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 3 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 3 O
PID .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / .ST 3
only O

Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-156

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Instruction Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-157

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the DEC and DECP Instructions

DEC and DECP instructions are decrement instructions. When a DEC instruction is run, it
subtracts 1 from D1.
The DEC and DECP instructions always pass power.

Confirming Execution Results

(1) If an overflow occurs as a result of the instruction, the system variable (bit) #L_CalcCarry
turns on.
(2) When the execution result is 0, the system variable #L_CalcZero turns ON.

Program Example
DEC
Every time the DEC instruction turns on, 1 is subtracted.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns on and passes power to the DEC instruction,
the DEC instruction subtracts 1 from the result data D1 (integer variable). When using a
normally open instruction, as long as the instruction is passing power, the DEC instruction
is continually run and subtracts 1 from D1.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-158

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
DECP

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the DECP instruction will be executed.
When the DECP instruction is executed, 1 is subtracted from D1(integer variable).
Even when using a normally open instruction, the DECP instruction executes only when it
detects an upward transition. Therefore, even when the operation is continuously ON, the
INCP instruction executes for only one scan and 1 is subtracted from D1(integer
variable).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-159

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.8 Operation (Time)

JADD and JADDP (Time Addition)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
JADD Operation 4
(Time Addition -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
JADDP Operation 4
(Time Addition -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2, and D1) in the JADD
and JADDP instructions.

Name Type Condition Instruction Possible: O

Step Count Not
Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯
Address X
(Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯
(Example: X
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-160

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Instruction Possible: O

Step Count Not
Possible: X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯
X
(output only) specified
Specify integer ⎯
X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯
X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯
variable[constant/variable] X
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time Other than .HR / .MIN / .SEC 4 O
PID .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / .ST ⎯
X
only
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-161

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Instruction Possible: O

Step Count Not
Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT / .ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV / .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR / .MO / .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ Other than .HR / .MIN / .SEC 4 O
U_ .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / .ST ⎯ X
only
Constant Integer −2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ± 1.175494351e − 38 to ⎯
X
± 3.402823466e + 38
Real ± 2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯
X
± 1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-162

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the JADD and JADDP Instructions

The JADD and JADDP instructions are time addition instructions. When a JADD instruction
is executed, the time variable in operand S1 will be added to the time variable in S2, and the
result of the addition is stored in the time variable in operand D1. The JADD and JADDP
instructions always pass power.

Time Variable
Time Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.HR Integer Variable Hours are input in BCD
VariableName.MIN Integer Variable Minutes are input in BCD
VariableName.SEC Integer Variable Seconds are input in BCD
In the JADD instruction, you cannot run time add operations on individual time variable
elements (.HR .MIN .SEC).
The time variables and each element thereof are saved as BCD data.

Confirming Execution Results

(1) If the result reaches 00:00' 00" after the instruction, an overflow will occur. The
#L_CalcCarry for the system variable (bit) turns on.
(2) If the operation result is 00 (h):00 (min):00 (s), the system variable #L_CalcZero turns
ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-163

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
JADD
When the positive transition instruction is turned ON, time addition will be performed.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns on and passes power to the JADD
instruction, the JADD instruction adds S1 (Data_1, Time variable) and S2 (Data_2, Time
variable) and stores the result in D1 (Time variable). When using a normally open
instruction, as long as the instruction is passing power, the JADD instruction continually
executes at each scan, performing the time add operation.

Example: When Data_1 in operand S1 is 12:10:45, and Data_2 in operand S2 is 6:55:20, if a

JADD instruction is executed, the result is 19:06:05, and 19:06:05 is stored in the result
data in operand D1.

Program Example
JADDP

(1) When the Normally Open instruction turns ON, the JADDP instruction will be executed.
When the JADDP instruction is executed, Data_1 (time variable) in operand S1 is added
to Data_2 (time variable) in operand S2, and the result of the addition is stored in operand
D1. Even when using a Normally Open instruction, only the upward transition is detected,
and the JADDP instruction is executed. Therefore, even when the variable of the NO
instruction is always ON, the JADDP instruction is executed only for one scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-164

Instruction Descriptions

JSUB and JSUBP (Time Subtraction)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
JSUB Operation 4
(Time Subtraction -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
JSUBP Operation 4
(Time Subtraction -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2, and D1) in the JSUB
and JSUBP instructions.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯
Address X
(Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯
(Example: X
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-165

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯
X
(output only) specified
Specify integer ⎯
X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯
X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯
variable[constant/variable] X
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time Other than .HR / .MIN / .SEC 4 O
PID .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / .ST ⎯
X
only
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-166

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT / .ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV / .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR / .MO / .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ Other than .HR / .MIN / .SEC 4 O
U_ .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / .ST ⎯ X
only
Constant Integer −2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ± 1.175494351e − 38 to ⎯
X
± 3.402823466e + 38
Real ± 2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯
X
± 1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-167

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the JSUB and JSUBP Instructions

The JSUB and JSUBP instructions are time subtraction instructions. When a JSUB
instruction is executed, the time variable in operand S2 will be subtracted from the time
variable in operand S1, and the result of the subtraction is stored in the time variable in
operand D1. The JSUB and JSUBP instructions always pass power.

Confirming Execution Results

(1) If the result does not reach 00:00' 00" after the instruction, an overflow will occur. The
#L_CalcCarry for the system variable (bit) turns on.
(2) If the operation result is 00 (h):00 (min):00 (s), the system variable #L_CalcZero turns
ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-168

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
JSUB
When the positive transition instruction is turned ON, time subtraction will be performed.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns on and passes power to the JSUB
instruction, the JSUB instruction subtracts S2 (Data_2, Time variable) from S1 (Data_1,
Time variable), and stores the result in D1 (Time variable). When using a normally open
instruction, on every scan the JSUB instruction receives power, it runs the date/time
calculation.

Example: When Data_1 in operand S1 is 12:10:45, and Data_2 in operand S2 is 6:55:20, if a

JSUB instruction is executed, the result is 5:15:25, and 5:15:25 is stored in operand D1.

Program Example
JSUBP

(1) When the Normally Open instruction turns ON, the JSUBP instruction will be executed.
When the JSUBP instruction is executed, Data_2 (time variable) in operand S2 is
subtracted from Data_1 (time variable) in operand S1, and the result of the subtraction is
stored in operand D1. Even when using a Normally Open instruction, only the upward
transition is detected, and the JSUBP instruction is executed. Therefore, even when the
variable of the NO instruction is always ON, the JSUBP instruction is executed only for
one scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-169

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.9 Operation (Logical)

AND and ANDP (Logical AND)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
AND Operation 4 to 13
(Logical AND -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
ANDP Operation 4 to 13
(Logical AND -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2, and D1) in the AND
and ANDP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the AND and ANDP instructions depends on the specification
method of the operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in the S2 operand + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in AND and ANDP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Data_2 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [Specify indirectly] = 3 steps} + {1

steps} = 7 steps.
The last 1 step is for the instruction. Make sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-170

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1 and S2) in the AND and
ANDP instructions.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 1
Address O
(Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 1
(Example: O
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1
(including I/O) specified O

Specify integer 2
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant] O
Specify integer array(entire
array)
Specify integer 3
variable[variable] or
O
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer 4
variable[constant/variable] O
.B/W[constant/variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-171

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify float ⎯
X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯
X
variable[variable]
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable ⎯
X
[constant]
Specify real variable ⎯
X
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / 2
O
.ST only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT / .ET only 2 O
C_ .PV / .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR / .MO / .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR / .MIN / .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / 2
.ST only O

Constant Integer −2147483648 to 1 O

2147483647

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-172

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the AND and ANDP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 1
Address O
(Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 1
(Example: O
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1
O
(output only) specified
Specify integer 2
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant] O
Specify integer array(entire
array)
Specify integer 3
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/ O
W[variable]
Specify integer 4
variable[constant/variable] O
.B/W[constant/variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-173

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify float ⎯
X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯
X
variable[variable]
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable ⎯
X
[constant]
Specify real variable ⎯
X
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / 2
O
.ST only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT / .ET only 2 O
C_ .PV / .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR / .MO / .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR / .MIN / .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP / .TR / .TD / .PA / .BA / 2
O
.ST only
Constant Integer −2147483648 to ⎯ X
2147483647

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-174

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the AND and ANDP Instructions

The AND and ANDP instructions are logical AND instructions. When the AND instruction
is executed, S1 and S2 will be logically ANDed and the result is stored in D1.
The AND and ANDP instructions always pass power. When using the AND and ANDP
instructions, if the types of variables specified in the S1, S2, and D1 operands are not the
same type, an error will occur. Specify the same variable type for the S1, S2, and D1
operands.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.
S1 Operator S2 D1
OFF AND OFF OFF
ON OFF OFF
OFF ON OFF
ON ON ON

When an AND instruction is executed, the D1 bit will be turned ON only when S1 and S2 are
ON. Otherwise, the D1 bit is OFF.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10
Operand S2 Integer constant 3
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

When operand D1 is an integer variable and you want to input hexadecimal values in
operands S1 and S2.
When 0x (zero and lower case x) is input, the following values will be interpreted as
hexadecimal values.
Operand S1 Integer constant 0xA
Operand S2 Integer constant 0x3
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

When Calculating Data in a Specified Array (Integer Variable Array)

Specifying the entire array
Data_1 Array size = 5
Data_2 Array size = 5
Result Array size = 5
Logical operations are performed on all arrays.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-175

Instruction Descriptions

Individually Specifying Array Variables

Data_1[0] Array size = 5
Data_2[0] Array size = 5
Result[n] Array size = 5
Logical operations are performed on individual
variables in the arrays.

Confirming Execution Results

(1) When the execution result is 0, the system variable #L_CalcZero turns ON.

Program Example
AND

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns on and passes power to the AND
instruction, it does a logical AND between Data_A and F0FF and stores the result in D1
(integer variable). When using a normally open instruction, as long as the instruction is
passing power, the AND instruction continually executes at each scan, performing the
logical AND operation.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-176

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
ANDP

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON and passes power to the ANDP instruction,
it does a logical AND between Data_A and F0FF and stores the result in D1 (integer
variable). Even when using a normally open instruction, the ANDP instruction executes
only when it detects the upward transition. As a result, even if the instruction is always on,
ANDP executes only at the first scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-177

Instruction Descriptions

OR and ORP (Logical OR)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
OR Operation 4 to 13
(Logical OR - Level
Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
ORP Operation 4 to 13
(Logical OR -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2, and D1) in the OR and
ORP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the OR and ORP instructions depends on the specification
method of the operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in OR and ORP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Data_2 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [Specify indirectly]= 3 steps} + {1

step} = 7 steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-178

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1 and S2) in the OR and ORP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer array(entire
array)
Specify integer 3 O
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer 4 O
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-179

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float variable ⎯ X
[variable]
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable ⎯ X
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 1 O
2147483647

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-180

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the OR and ORP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(output only) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer array(entire
array)
Specify integer 3 O
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer 4 O
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-181

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float variable ⎯ X
[variable]
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable ⎯ X
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to ⎯ X
2147483647

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-182

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the OR and ORP Instructions

The OR and ORP instructions are logic OR instructions. When an OR instruction is executed,
S1 and S2 are logically ORed and the result is stored in D1.
The OR and ORP instructions always pass power. When using the OR and ORP instructions,
if the variables specified in operands S1, S2, and D1 are not the same type, an error will
occurs. Specify the same variable type in operands S1, S2, and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

S1 Operator S2 D1
OFF OR OFF OFF
ON OFF ON
OFF ON ON
ON ON ON
When an OR instruction is executed, the D1 bit will be turned ON only when S1 and S2 are
ON. Otherwise, the D1 bit is OFF.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10
Operand S2 Integer constant 3
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

When Calculating Data in a Specified Array (Integer Variable Array)

Specifying the entire array
Data_1 Array size = 5
Data_2 Array size = 5
Result Array size = 5
Logical operations are performed on all
arrays.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-183

Instruction Descriptions

Individually Specifying Array Variables

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5
Data_2 [0] Array size = 5
Result [n] Array size = 5
Logical operations are performed on
individual variables in the arrays.

Confirming Execution Results

(1) When the execution result is 0, the system variable #L_CalcZero turns ON.

Program Example
OR

(1) When the positive transition instruction start turns ON, the OR instruction will be
executed. When the OR instruction is executed, the result value obtained by ORing
Data_A with FOFF is stored in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, as long as the instruction variable is ON, an OR
instruction is always executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-184

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
ORP

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the ORP instruction will be executed.
When the ORP instruction is executed, the result value obtained after Data_A is ORed
with FOFF is stored in D1.
Even when using a normally open instruction, the ORP instruction executes only when it
detects the upward transition.Therefore, even when the variable of the NO instruction is
always ON, the ORP instruction is executed only for one scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-185

Instruction Descriptions

XOR and XORP (Logical XOR)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
XOR Operation 4 to 13
(Logical XOR -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
XORP Operation 4 to 13
(Logical XOR -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2, and D1) in the XOR
and XORP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the XOR and XORP instructions depends on the specification
method of the operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in the XOR and XORP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Data_2 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [Specify indirectly]= 3 steps} + {1

step} = 7 steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-186

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1 and S2) in the XOR and
XORP instructions
.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer array(entire
array)
Specify integer 3 O
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer 4 O
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-187

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-188

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the XOR and XORP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(output specified
only) Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer array(entire
array)
Specify integer 3 O
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer 4 O
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-189

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float variable ⎯ X
[variable]
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable ⎯ X
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to ⎯ X
2147483647

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-190

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the XOR and XORP Instructions

XOR and XORP instructions are exclusive OR instructions. When an XOR instruction runs,
it runs a logical XOR operation between S1 and S2 stores the result in D1. The XOR and
XORP instructions always pass power. When using XOR and XORP, specify the same
variable data type in operands S1, S2, and D1 to avoid errors.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

S1 Operator S2 D1
OFF XOR OFF OFF
ON OFF ON
OFF ON ON
ON ON OFF

When an XOR instruction is executed, the D1 bit will be turned ON only when either S1 or
S2 is ON. Otherwise, the D1 bit is OFF.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer constant 3
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xA

Operand S2 Integer constant 0x3
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

When Calculating Data in a Specified Array (Integer Variable Array)

Specifying the entire array
Data_1 Array size = 5
Data_2 Array size = 5
Result Array size = 5
Logical operations are performed on all
arrays.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-191

Instruction Descriptions

Individually Specifying Array Variables

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5
Data_2 [0] Array size = 5
Result [n] Array size = 5
Logical operations are performed on
individual variables in the arrays.

Confirming Execution Results

(1) When the execution result is 0, the system variable #L_CalcZero turns ON.

Program Example
XOR

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the XOR instruction will be executed.
When the XOR instruction is executed, the result value obtained by XORing Data_A with
FOFF is stored in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, as long as the instruction variable is ON, the
XOR instruction is always executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-192

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
XORP

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the XORP instruction will be executed.
When the XORP instruction is executed, the result value obtained after Data_A is XORed
with F0FF is stored in D1.
Even when using a normally open instruction, the XORP instruction executes only when
it detects the upward transition. Therefore, even when the variable of the NO instruction
is always ON, the XORP instruction is executed only for one scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-193

Instruction Descriptions

NOT and NOTP (Logical NOT)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
NOT Operation 3 to 9
(Logical NOT -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
NOTP Operation 3 to 9
(Logical NOT -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the NOT and
NOTP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the NOT and NOTP instructions depends on the specification
method of the operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in the NOT and NOTP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Result [Specify indirectly] =3 steps} + {1 step} = 5 steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-194

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in the NOT and NOTP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-195

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-196

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the NOT and NOTP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(output only) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer array(entire
array)
Specify integer 3 O
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer 4 O
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-197

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float variable ⎯ X
[variable]
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable ⎯ X
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to ⎯ X
2147483647

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-198

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the NOT and NOTP Instructions

The NOT and NOTP instructions are logical invert instructions. When a NOT instruction is
run, S1 is logically inverted and the result is stored in D1. NOT and NOTP instructions
always pass power. When using NOT and NOTP instructions, specify the same variable data
type in operands S1 and D1 to avoid errors.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

S1 Operator D1
OFF NOT ON
ON OFF

When a NOT instruction is executed, if the S1 bit is OFF, the D1 bit turns ON. If the S1 bit is
ON, the D1 bit turns OFF.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

When operand D1 is an integer variable and you want to input a hexadecimal value
in operand S1.
When 0x (zero and lower case x) is input, the following values will be interpreted as
hexadecimal values.

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xA

Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

When Calculating Data in a Specified Array (Integer Variable Array)

Specifying the entire array
Data_1 Array size = 5
Result Array size = 5
Logical operations are performed on all
arrays.

Individually Specifying Array Variables

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5
Result [0] Array size = 5
Logical operations are performed on
individual variables in the arrays.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-199

Instruction Descriptions

Confirming Execution Results

(1) When the execution result is 0, the system variable #L_CalcZero turns ON.

Program Example
NOT

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the NOT instruction will be executed.
When the NOT instruction is executed, the result value obtained by logically inverting
Data_A is stored in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, as long as the instruction variable is ON, the
NOT instruction is always executed.

Program Example
NOTP

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the NOTP instruction will be executed.
When the NOTP is executed, the result value obtained after Data_A is logically inverted
is stored in D1.
Even when using a normally open instruction, the NOTP instruction executes only when
it detects the upward transition. Therefore, even when the variable of the NO instruction
is always ON, the NOTP instruction is executed only for one scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-200

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.10 Operation (Transfer)

MOV and MOVP (Transfer)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
MOV Transfer 3 to 9
(Transfer -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
MOVP Transfer 3 to 9
(Transfer - positive
transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1 and D1) in the MOV and
MOVP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the MOV and MOVP instructions depends on the specification
method of the operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in the MOV and MOVP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Result [Specify indirectly] =3 steps} + {1 step} = 5 steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-201

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in the MOV and MOVP
instructions
.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer 3 O
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer 4 O
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-202

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ 1 O
Format Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable [variable] 3 O
Real ⎯ 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-203

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the MOV and MOVP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(output only) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer 3 O
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer 4 O
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-204

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ 1 O
Format Specify float 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify float variable 3 O
[variable]
Real ⎯ 1 O
Specify real variable 2 O
[constant]
Specify real variable 3 O
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ X

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-205

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the MOV and MOVP Instructions

The MOV and MOVP instructions are transfer instructions. When the MOV instruction is
executed, the value in S1 is stored in D1.
The MOV and MOVP instructions always pass power. When using the MOV and MOVP
instructions, if the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 are not the same type, an error
will occur. Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values are interpreted as float
values.
Operand S1 Float constant 0.11
Operand D1 Float variable OUT3

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values are interpreted as real values.
Operand S1 Real constant 0.11
Operand D1 Real constant OUT4

When transferring data in a specified array (integer variable array) Specify the array using
data [0] or data [N] (N indicates an integer variable).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-206

Instruction Descriptions

When operands S1 and D1 specify the entire array, an error will occur even if the variables
are the same type.
Data_1 Array size = 5
Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left
diagram results in an error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [n] Array size = 5
The figure to the left shows that the
operand is specified successfully (no
error).

Confirming Execution Results

(1) If a numeric value cannot be indicated by operand S1 (when the execution result exceeds
the range), the instruction will not be executed.
#L_Error turns ON and an error code (6706) is set in #L_CalcErrCode.
The output result D1 keeps its previous value with which the instruction was executed
successfully.

Program Example
MOV
Stores the constant in the integer variable.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the MOV instruction will be executed.
When the MOV instruction is executed, the constant 10 is stored in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, as long as the instruction variable is ON, the
MOV instruction is always executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-207

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
MOVP

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the MOVP instruction is executed. When
the MOVP instruction is executed, the constant 10 is stored in D1.
Even when using a normally open instruction, the MOVP instruction executes only when
it detects the upward transition. Therefore, even when the variable of the NO instruction
is always ON, the MOVP instruction is executed only for one scan.
BLMV and BLMVP (Block Transfer)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
BLMV Transfer 6 to 10
(Block Transfer -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
BLMVP Transfer 6 to 10
(Block Transfer -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2, and D1) in the BLMV
and BLMVP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the BLMV and BLMVP instructions depends on the
specification method of the operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of
steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-208

Instruction Descriptions

Example: Converting the number of steps in the BLMV and BLMVP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {10 = 1 step}+{Result [0] = 2 steps} + {1 step}= 6 steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1 and D1) in the BLMV and
BLMVP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-209

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) 2 O
Specify bit array ([variable]) 3 O
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable [variable] 3 O
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-210

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ 1 O
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-211

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S2) in for the BLMV and
BLMVP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-212

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float variable ⎯ X
[variable]
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable ⎯ X
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant ⎯ 1 to 4096 1 O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-213

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the BLMV and BLMVP Instructions

The BLMV and BLMVP instructions are block transfer instructions. When the BLMV
instruction is executed, the number of data elements indicated in S2 are copied from S1 to
D1. The BLMV and BLMVP instructions always pass power. When using the BLMV and
BLMVP instructions, if the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 are not the same type,
an error will occur. Specify the same variable type in the operands S1 and D1.

Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer variable (array) Data_1 [0]

Operand S2 Integer constant 5
Operand D1 Integer variable (array) Data_2[0]

When operand D1 is an integer variable and you want to input a hexadecimal value
in operand S2
When 0x (zero and lower case "x") is input, the following values are interpreted as
hexadecimal values.

Operand S1 Integer variable (array) Data_1 [0]

Operand S2 Integer constant 0x5
Operand D1 Integer Variable (array) Data 2[0]

Confirming Execution Results

(1) When the range of the array is exceeded (when the execution result exceeds the range), an
instruction will not be executed. #L_Error turns ON and an error code is set in
#L_CalcErrCode. The output result D1 keeps the last result of a successful operation.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-214

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
BLMV
Copies 1 through 5 from Data_1 to Data_2.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the BLMV instruction will be
executed. When the BLMV instruction is executed, numbers 0 through 4 in data 1, stored
in D1, are copied to numbers 0 through 4 in data 2.
When the start is a normally open instruction, as long as the start is ON, the BLMV
instruction is always executed.
Array Variable Data 1 5 Executed Data 2
Name Instructions
Element Data_1[0] → Data_2 [0]
Data_1 [1] → Data_2 [1]
Data_1 [2] → Data_2 [2]
Data_1 [3] → Data_2 [3]
Data_1 [4] Data_2 [4]
→
Data_1 [5] Data_2 [5]
Data_1 [6] Data_2 [6]
Data_1 [7] Data_2 [7]
Data_1 [8] Data_2 [8]
Data_1 [9] Data_2 [9]
Data_1 [10] Data_2 [10]

Program Example
BLMVP

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-215

Instruction Descriptions

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the BLMVP instruction will be executed.
When the BLMVP instruction is executed, numbers 0 through 4 in data 1, stored in D1,
are copied to numbers 0 through 4 in data 2.
Even when using a normally open instruction, only the start ON up edge is detected, and the BLMVP
instruction is executed.
Therefore, even when the variable of the NO instruction is always ON, the BLMVP
instruction is executed only for one scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-216

Instruction Descriptions

FLMV and FLMVP (Multipoint Transfer)

Symbols and Features

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
FLMV Transfer 4 to 10
(Multipoint Transfer -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
FLMVP Transfer 4 to 10
(Multipoint Transfer -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2, and D1) in the FLMV
and FLMVP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the FLMV and FLMVP instructions depends on the
specification method of the operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of
steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in the FLMV and FLMVP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 [0 ] = 2 steps } + {5 = 1 step} + {Data_2 [0] = 2 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-217

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in the FLMV and FLMVP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable [variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-218

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ 1 O
Format Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-219

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S2) in the FLMV and FLMVP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-220

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float variable ⎯ X
[variable]
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable ⎯ X
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant ⎯ 1 to 4096 (Maximum 1 O
number of arrays)

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-221

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the FLMV and FLMVP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable [variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-222

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-223

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the FLMV and FLMVP Instructions

FLMV and FLMVP instructions are multiple point transfer instructions. When a FLMV
instruction is run, the value in S1 is copied to S2 number of addresses, beginning with the
address in D1.
FLMV and FLMVP instructions always pass power. When using FLMV and FLMVP
instructions, specify the same data type in operands S1 and D1 to avoid errors.

Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer variable (array) Data_1 [0]

Operand S2 Integer constant 5
Operand D1 Integer variable (array) Data_2[0]

When operand D1 is an integer variable and you want to input hexadecimal values in
operand S2.
When 0x (zero and lower case x) is input, the following values will be interpreted as
hexadecimal values.

Operand S1 Integer variable (array) Data_1 [0]

Operand S2 Integer constant 0x5
Operand D1 Integer Variable (array) Data 2[0]

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-224

Instruction Descriptions

Confirming Execution Results

Program Example
FLMV
Copies the data in data 1 to elements 0 through 4 in data 2.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the FLMV instruction will be executed.
When the FLMV instruction is executed, data 1, stored in D1, is copied to elements 0
through 4 in data 2.
When the start is a normally open instruction, as long as the start is ON, the FLMV
instruction is always executed.

Array Variable Name Data 1 5 Executed Instructions Data 2

Element Data 1 → Data_2 [0]
→ Data_2 [1]
→ Data_2 [2]
→ Data_2 [3]
→ Data_2 [4]
Data_2 [5]
Data_2 [6]
Data_2 [7]
Data_2 [8]
Data_2 [9]
Data_2 [10]

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-225

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
FLMVP

(1) When the normally open instruction turns ON, the FLMVP instruction will be executed.
When the FLMVP instruction is executed, the data in data 1, stored in D1, is copied to
numbers 0 through 4 in data 2.
Even when using a normally open instruction, the FLMVP instruction executes only when
it detects the upward transition.Therefore, even when the variable of the NO instruction is
always ON, the FLMVP instruction is executed only for one scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-226

Instruction Descriptions

XCH and XCHP (Exchange)

Symbols and Features

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
XCH Transfer 3 to 7
(Exchange -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
XCHP Transfer 3 to 7
(Exchange -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (D1 and D2) in the XCH and
XCHP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the XCH and XCHP instructions depends on the specification
method of the operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand D1 + Number of steps in operand D2 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in the XCH and XCHP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Data_2 = 1 step} + {1 step} = 3 steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-227

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (D1 and D2) in the XCH and
XCHP instructions
.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(Output specified
included) Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-228

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable [variable] ⎯ X
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-229

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the XCH and XCHP Instructions

XCH and XCHP instructions are exchange instructions. When a XCH instruction is run, the
data in operands D1 and D2 are switched.
The XCH and XCHP instructions always pass power. When using XCH and XCHP
instructions, specify the same data type in operands D1 and D2 to avoid errors.

Confirming Execution Results

(1) When the result exceeds the array size, the instruction will not run, the system variable
#L_Error turns on, and the error code is written to #L_CalcErrCode. D1 and D2 revert to
values from the previous successfully run instruction.

Program Example
XCH
Exchanges the contents of data 1 and data 2.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the XCH instruction will be executed.
When the XCH instruction is executed, the summary of the Data_1[0] in D1 and the
Data_2[0]in D2 will be switched.
When using a normally open instruction, as long as the instruction variable is ON, the
XCH instruction is always executed.

Array Variable Name Data 1 Instruction Execution Data 2

Element Data_1[0] ←→ Data_2 [0]
Data_1 [1] Data_2 [1]
Data_1 [2] Data_2 [2]
Data_1 [3] Data_2 [3]
Data_1 [4] Data_2 [4]

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-230

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
XCHP

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the XCHP instruction will be executed.
When the XCHP instruction is executed, the summary of the Data_1[0] in D1 and the
Data_2[0] in D2 will be switched.
Even when the operation is a normally open instruction, the XCHP instruction will execute only
when an upward transition is detected.
Therefore, even when the variable of the normally open instruction is always ON, the
XCHP instruction executes for only one scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-231

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.11 Calculation Instruction (Shift Instruction)

SHL and SHLP (Shift Left)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
SHL Shift 4 to 10
(Shift Left -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
SHLP Shift 4 to 10
(Shift Left - positive
transition)

Operand Settings
The following table lists the specifiable content of operands S1, S2, and D1 for the SHL and
SHLP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the SHL and SHLP instructions depends on the specified
operands. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

For example, Converting the number of steps in SHL and SHLP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 =1 step} + {10 = 1 step} + {Data_2 = 1 step} + {1 step} = 4 steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-232

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in SHL and SHLP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or entire
array
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-233

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-234

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S2) in SHL and SHLP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable])] ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-235

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer 0 to 131071 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-236

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in SHL and SHLP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(Output specified
included) Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or entire array
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-237

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-238

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the SHL and SHLP Instructions

When an SHL or SHLP instruction is executed, the S1 bits are shifted to the left S2 number
of bits. Every time 1 bit is shifted, the leftmost bit (the most significant bit) is lost. 0 is stored
in the rightmost empty bit. The results are stored in D1.
The SHL and SHLP instructions always pass power. When using SHL and SHLP
instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 are not the
same type. Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

S1: Shift address Specifies the address to shift.

S2: Number of bits to shift Specifies the number of bits to shift.
D1: Store address Specifies the address to store the shift result.

For example, When 1 bit is shifted left

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer constant 20
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF

Operand S2 Integer constant 0xF
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

Use the same format when shifting data in a specified array (integer variable array) and when
specifying an array element.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-239

Instruction Descriptions

An error will occur if the formats are different.

Data_1 Array size = 5
Data_2 Array size = 5
Number of bits to shift Array specification None

If the S1 and D1 arrays are the same size, S1 is treated like a single giant integer. Bits are
shifted one element to the next element.
The topmost bits of each element are not lost. However, the topmost bit in the last element is
lost. Specify S2 as 0 or higher (32 x Array Size −1).

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Data_2 [0] Array size = 5
Number of bits to shift Array specification None

If both S1 and D1 are not in an array, this instruction shifts the 32 bits in S1. Specify a value
between 0 and 31 for S2.

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
If an overflow occurs as a result of the shift operation, the last overflowed bit is stored in
#L_CalcCarry.
When the execution results in an error, the error information is stored in #L_Status.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-240

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
SHL
Determines whether the most significant bit is ON or OFF.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, an SHL instruction will be executed.
When the SHL instruction is executed, the result from shifting 1 bit to the left is stored in
D1.
(2) When 1 bit is shifted to the left, you can check whether the most significant bit before data
shifting is ON or OFF from the state of #L_CalcCarry.
(Note) When using a normally open instruction, the SHL instruction is always executed as
long as the normally open instruction is ON.

Program Example
SHLP

SHLP and SHL instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In SHLP
instructions, even when using a normally open instruction, only the upward transition is
detected and the SHLP instruction is executed. Therefore, the SHLP instruction is executed
only for one scan, even when the normally open instruction remains ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-241

Instruction Descriptions

SHR and SHRP (Shift Right)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
SHR Shift 4 to 10
(Shift Right -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
SHRP Shift 4 to 10
(Shift Right - positive
transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1, S2, and D1 for the SHR and
SHRP instructions.
The number of steps in the SHR and SHRP instructions depends on the specified operand.
The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

For example, Converting the number of steps in SHR and SHRP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 =1 step} + {10 = 1 step} + {Data_2 = 1 step} + {1 step} = 4 steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-242

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in SHR and SHRP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or entire array
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-243

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-244

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S2) in SHR and SHRP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-245

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer 0 to 131071 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-246

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in SHR and SHRP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(Output specified
included) Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
entire array
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-247

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-248

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of SHR and SHRP Instructions

When the SHR or SHRP instruction is executed, the S1 bits are shifted to the right S2 number
of bits. Every time 1 bit is shifted, the rightmost bit (least significant bit) is lost. 0 is stored in
the empty topmost bit positions. The result is stored in D1.
The SHR and SHRP instructions always pass power. When using SHR and SHRP
instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 operands are
not the same type. Specify the same variable type in the S1 and D1 operands.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

S1: Shift address Specifies the address to shift.

S2: Number of bits to shift Specifies the number of bits to shift.
D1: Store address Specifies the address to store the shift result.

For example, when 1 bit is shifted to the right

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer constant 20
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF

Operand S2 Integer constant 0xF
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

Use the same format when shifting data in a specified array (integer variable array) and when
specifying an array element.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-249

Instruction Descriptions

An error will occur if the formats are different.

Data_1 Array size = 5

Data_2 Array Size = 5
Number of bits to shift Array specification None

If the S1 and D1 arrays are the same size, S1 is treated like a single giant integer. Bits are
shifted one element to the next element.
The bottom bit of each element is not lost, except for the bottom bit in the last element.
Specify S2 as 0 or higher, up to (32 x Array Size −1).

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Data_2 [0] Array size = 5
Number of bits to shift Array specification None

If both S1 and D1 are not arrays, 32 bits are shifted. Specify S2 between 0 and 31.

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-250

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
SHR
Determines whether the least significant bit is ON or OFF.

(1) When the variable of the positive transition instruction turns ON, the SHR instruction is
run. The SHR instruction shifts bits in Data_1 one bit to the right and stores the result in
D1.
(2) After the bit shift operation is complete, you can check the previous value of the least
significant bit in Data_1 by using the #L_CalcCarry system variable.
(Supplementary) When using a normally open instruction, the SHR instruction is always
executed as long as the bit remains ON.

Program Example
SHRP

When to run the instruction is different between SHRP and SHR instructions. In the SHRP
instruction, even when using a normally open instruction, only the upward transition of the
bit is detected, and the SHRP instruction is executed. Even if the bit of the normally open
instruction remains ON, the SHRP instruction is executed only for one scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-251

Instruction Descriptions

SAL and SALP (Arithmetic Shift Left)

Symbols and Features

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
SAL Shift 4 to 10
(Arithmetic Shift Left -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
SALP Shift 4 to 10
(Arithmetic Shift Left -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following table lists the specifiable content of operands S1, S2, and D1 for the SAL and
SALP instructions.
The number of steps in the SAL and SALP instructions depends on the specified operand.
The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

For example, Converting the number of steps in SAL and SALP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 =1 step} + {10 = 1 step} + {Data_2 = 1 step} + {1 step} = 4 steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-252

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in SAL and SALP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-253

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-254

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S2) in SAL and SALP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-255

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer 0 to 31 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-256

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in SAL and SALP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(Output specified
included) Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-257

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-258

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the SAL and SALP Instructions

When the SAL or SALP instruction is executed, the S1 bits are shifted to the left S2 number
of bits. Every time 1 bit is shifted, the 30th bit is lost. 0 is stored in the bottom-most empty
bit. The result is stored in D1.
The SAL and SALP instructions always pass power. When using SAL and SALP
instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 are not the
same type. Specify the same variable type in the S1 and D1 operands.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

S1: Shift address Specifies the address to shift.

S2: Number of bits to shift Specifies the number of bits to shift.
D1: Store address Specifies the address to store the shift result.

For example, When 1 bit is shifted left

Most significant bit Least significant bit

Before instruction 31 30 29 28 3 2 1 0
execution 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 is stored in the
Erased least significant
bit.
After instruction 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0
execution

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer constant 20
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF

Operand S2 Integer constant 0xF
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

When specifying an array variable, specify an array element.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Data_2 [0] Array size = 5
Number of bits to shift Array specification None

31 array element bits are shifted. For S2, specify a value between 0 and 31.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-259

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error information is stored in #L_Status.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
SAL

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the SAL instruction is executed. When
the SAL instruction is executed, the result of the bit shift is stored in D1. The most
significant bit is not shifted, and zero is stored in the least significant bit.
(Supplementary) When using a normally open instruction, the SAL instruction is always
executed as long as the normally open bit is ON.

Program Example
SALP

The SALP and SAL instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
SALP instruction, Even when using a normally open instruction, the SLAP instruction
executes only when it detects the upward transition.As a result, if the bit remains ON, the
SALP instruction is executed only for one scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-260

Instruction Descriptions

SAR and SARP (Arithmetic Shift Right)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
SAR Shift 4 to 10
(Arithmetic Shift Right -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
SARP Shift 4 to 10
(Arithmetic Shift Right -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following table lists the specifiable content of operands S1, S2, and D1 for the SAR and
SARP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the SAR and SARP instructions depends on the specified
operands. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

For example, Converting the number of steps in SAR and SARP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 =1 step} + {10 = 1 step} + {Data_2 = 1 step} + {1 step} = 4 steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-261

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in SAR and SARP
instructions.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-262

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-263

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S2) in SAR and SARP
instructions.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-264

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer 0 to 31 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-265

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in SAR and SARP
instructions.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(Output specified
included) Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-266

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-267

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the SAR and SARP Instructions

When the SAR or SARP instruction is executed, the S1 bits are shifted to the right of the S2
number of bits. For each bit shift, the bottom-most bit (the least significant bit) is lost, and the
most significant bit is stored in the topmost empty bit. The result is stored in D1. The SAR
and SARP instructions always pass power. When using the SAR and SARP instructions, an
error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 are not the same type.
Specify the same variable type in the S1 and D1 operands.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

S1: Shift address Specifies the address to shift.

S2: Number of bits to shift Specifies the number of bits to shift.
D1: Store address Specifies the address to store the shift result.

For example, When 1 bit is shifted to the right

Most significant bit Least significant bit

31 30 29 28 3 2 1 0
Before instruction
execution 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1

Erased
After instruction 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
execution

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer constant 20
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF

Operand S2 Integer constant 0xF
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

When specifying an array variable, specify an array element.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Data_2 [0] Array size = 5
Number of bits to shift Array specification None

31 array element bits are shifted. For S2, specify a value between 0 and 31.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-268

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

Program Example
SAR

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the SAR instruction will be executed.
When the SAR instruction is executed, the 1 bit to the right is stored in D1. The most
significant bit is not shifted but is also copied to D1. For every bit that shifts, the most
significant bit is copied to the topmost empty bit.
(Supplementary) When using a normally open instruction, the SAR instruction is always
executed as long as the bit is ON.

Program Example
SALP

The SARP and SAR instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
SARP instruction, even when using a normally open instruction, the SARP instruction is
executed only when a positive transition is detected. As a result, even if the bit remains ON,
the SARP instruction is executed only for one scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-269

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.12 Operation (Rotation Instruction)

ROL and ROLP (Rotate Left)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
ROL Rotate 4 to 10
(Rotate Left -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
ROLP Rotate 4 to 10
(Rotate Left - positive
transition)

Operand Settings
The following table lists the specifiable content of operands S1, S2, and D1 for the ROL and
ROLP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the ROL and ROLP instructions depends on the specified
operands. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

For example, Converting the number of steps in ROL and ROLP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 =1 step} + {10 = 1 step} + {Data_2 = 1 step} + {1 step} = 4 steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-270

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in ROL and ROLP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or entire
array
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-271

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-272

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S2) in ROL and ROLP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-273

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer 0 to 131071 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-274

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in ROL and ROLP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(Output specified
included) Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or entire
array
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-275

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-276

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the ROL and ROLP Instructions

When the ROL or ROLP instruction is executed, the S1 bits are rotated to the left S2 number
of bits. Every time 1 bit is rotated, the topmost bit (the most significant bit) is rotated to the
bottom-most bit (least significant bit). The result is stored in D1. The ROL and ROLP
instructions always pass power. When using the ROL and ROLP instructions, if the variables
specified in operands S1 and D1 are not the same type, an error will occur. Specify the same
variable type in the S1 and D1 operands.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

S1: Rotation address Specifies an address to rotate bits.

S2: Number of bits to rotate Specifies the number of bits to rotate.
D1: Storage device Specifies an address for storing the results after rotating bits.

For example, When 1 bit is rotated to left

Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 bit is rotated
to left
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

Most significant bit Least significant bit

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer constant 20
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF

Operand S2 Integer constant 0xF
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

Use the same format when rotating data in a specified array (integer variable array) and when
specifying an array element.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-277

Instruction Descriptions

An error will occur if the formats are different.

Data_1 Array size = 5

Data_2 Array Size = 5
Number of bits to shift Array specification None

If the arrays of S1 and D1 are the same size, S1 is treated as if it's a giant integer. Bits are
rotated from one element to the next.
The entire array is rotated, not bits within each element. Specify S2 as 0 or higher, up to (32 x
Array Size −1).

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Data_2 [0] Array size = 5
Number of bits to shift Array specification None

If both S1 and D1 are not arrays, 32 bits are rotated. For S2, specify a value between 0 and
31.

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
If an overflow results from the rotation instruction, the overflowed bit is stored in
#L_CalcCarry.
When the execution results in an error, the error information is stored in #L_Status.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-278

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
ROL

(1) When a positive transition instruction turns ON, the ROL instruction is executed. When
the ROL instruction is executed, the result of rotating 1 bit is stored in D1.
(Supplementary) When using a normally open instruction, the ROL instruction is always
executed as long as the bit is ON.

Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 bit is rotated
to left
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

Most significant bit Least significant bit

Program Example
ROLP

The ROLP and ROL instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
ROLP instruction, even when using a normally open instruction, only the upward transition
of the bit is detected, and the ROLP instruction is executed. As a result, even if the bit
remains ON, the ROLP instruction is executed only for one scan.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-279

Instruction Descriptions

ROR and RORP (Rotate Right)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
ROR Rotate 4 to 10
(Rotate Right -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
RORP Rotate 4 to 10
(Rotate Right - positive
transition)

Operand Settings
The following table lists the specifiable content of operands S1, S2, and D1 for ROR and
RORP instructions..
The number of steps in the ROR and RORP instructions depends on the specified operand.
The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

For example, Converting the number of steps in the ROR and RORP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 =1 step} + {10 = 1 step} + {Data_2 = 1 step} + {1 step} = 4 steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-280

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in ROR and RORP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or entire
array
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-281

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-282

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S2) in ROR and RORP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-283

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer 0 to 131071 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-284

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in ROR and RORP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(Output specified
included) Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or entire array
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-285

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-286

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the ROR and RORP Instructions

When the ROR or RORP instruction is executed, the S1 bits are rotated to the right S2
number of bits. Every time 1 bit is
rotated, the information of the bottom-most bit (the least significant bit) is stored in the
topmost empty bit.
The result is stored in D1. The ROR and RORP instructions always pass power. When using
the ROR and RORP instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1
and D1 are not the same type. Specify the same variable type in the S1 and D1 operands.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

S1: Rotation address Specifies an address to rotate bits.

S2: Number of bits to rotate Specifies the number of bits to rotate.
D1: Storage device Specifies an address for storing the results after rotating bits.

For example, When 1 bit is rotated to right

Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 bit is rotated to
right
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

Most significant bit Least significant bit

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer constant 20
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF

Operand S2 Integer constant 0xF
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-287

Instruction Descriptions

Use the same format when rotating data in a specified array (integer variable array) and when
specifying an array element.
An error will occur if the formats are different.

Data_1 Array size = 5

Data_2 Array Size = 5
Number of bits to shift Array specification None

If the arrays of S1 and D1 are the same size, S1 is treated as if it's a giant integer. Bits are
rotated from one element to the next.
The entire array is rotated, not just bits in each element. For S2, specify a value from 0 to (32
x Array Size −1).

Data_1 [0] Array Size = 5

Data_2 [0] Array Size = 5
Number of bits to shift Array specification None

If both S1 and D1 are not arrays, 32 bits are rotated. For S2, specify a value between 0 and
31.

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-288

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
ROR

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the ROR instruction is executed. When
the ROR instruction is executed, the result of rotating 1 bit to the right is stored in D1.
(Supplementary) When using a normally open instruction, the ROR instruction is always
executed as long as the bit is ON.

Bit 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
1 bit is rotated to
right
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1

Most significant bit Least significant bit

Program Example
RORP

The RORP and ROR instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. For
RORP, even when using a normally open instruction, only the upward transition is detected,
and the RORP instruction is executed. Therefore, the RORP instruction is executed only for
one scan, even when the bit confirmation continues to turn ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-289

Instruction Descriptions

RCL and RCLP (Rotate Left with Carry Over)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
RCL Rotate 4 to 10
(Rotate Left with Carry-
over -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
RCLP Rotate 4 to 10
(Rotate Left with Carry-
over - positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following table lists the specifiable content of operands S1, S2, and D1 for the RCL and
RCLP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the RCL and RCLP instructions depends on the specified
operands. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

For example, Converting the number of steps in the RCL and RCLP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 =1 step} + {10 = 1 step} + {Data_2 = 1 step} + {1 step} = 4 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-290

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in RCL and RCLP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-291

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-292

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S2) in RCL and RCLP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-293

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable ⎯ X
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer 0 to 32 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-294

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in RCL and RCLP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(Output specified
included) Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-295

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-296

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the RCL and RCLP Instructions

When the RCL or RCLP instruction is executed, the S1 bits are rotated to the left S2 number
of bits. The topmost bit (the most significant bit) is stored in a carry flag, and the carry flag (1
or 0) is rotated to the bottom-most bit (the least significant bit).
The result is stored in D1. The RCL and RCLP instructions always pass power. When using
the RCL and RCLP instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1
and D1 are not the same type. Specify the same variable type in the S1 and D1 operands.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

S1: Rotation address Specifies an address to rotate bits.

S2: Number of bits to rotate Specifies the number of bits to rotate.
D1: Storage device Specifies an address for storing the results after rotating bits.

For example, When 1 bit is rotated to left (with carry over)

Most significant bit Least significant bit Information in a carry
flag before execution of
Before an instruction
instruction 31 30 29 28 3 2 1 0
execution 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0

After
instruction 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
execution
The most significant bit is stored in a carry flag. Information in a carry
flag after execution of
an instruction

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer constant 20
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF

Operand S2 Integer constant 0xF
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

Data_1 [0] Array Size = 5

Data_2 [0] Array Size = 5
Number of bits to shift Array specification None

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-297

Instruction Descriptions

If both S1 and D1 are not an array, 32 bits are rotated with carry over.
For S2, specify a value between 0 and 32.
System Variables Indicating Execution Results
When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
If an overflow results from the rotation instruction, the overflowed bit is stored in
#L_CalcCarry.
When the execution results in an error, the error information is stored in #L_Status.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
RCL

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the RCL instruction is executed. When
the RCL instruction is executed, the result from rotating 1 bit with carry over is stored in
D1.
(2) When 1 bit is shifted to the left with carry over, you can use #L_CalcCarry to check the
value of the most significant bit before the rotate operation.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-298

Instruction Descriptions

(Supplementary) When using a normally open instruction, the RCL instruction is always
executed as long as the bit is ON.
Most significant bit Least significant bit Information in a carry
flag before execution of
an instruction
Before 31 30 29 28 3 2 1 0
instruction
execution 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0

After
instruction 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
execution
Information in a carry
The most significant bit is stored in a carry flag.
flag after execution of
an instruction

Program Example
RCLP

The RCLP and RCL instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
RCLP instruction, Even when using a normally open instruction, the RCLP instruction
executes only when it detects the upward transition. Therefore, the RCLP instruction is
executed only for one scan, even when the bit remains ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-299

Instruction Descriptions

RCR and RCRP (Rotate right with carry over)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
RCR Rotate 4 to 10
(Rotate Right with Carry-
over -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
RCRP Rotate 4 to 10
(Rotate Right with Carry-
over - positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following table lists the specifiable content of operands S1, S2, and D1 for the RCR and
RCRP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the RCR and RCRP instructions depends on the specified
operands. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

For example, Converting the number of steps in RCR and RCRP instructions
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 =1 step} + {10 = 1 step} + {Data_2 = 1 step} + {1 step} = 4 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-300

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in RCR and RCRP
instructions
.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-301

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable ⎯ X
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-302

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S2) in RCR and RCRP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-303

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer 0 to 32 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-304

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in RCR and RCRP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(Output specified
included) Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-305

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-306

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the RCR and RCRP Instructions

When the RCR or RCRP instruction is executed, the S1 bits are rotated to the right S2
number of bits. The bottom-most bit (the least most bit) is stored in a carry flag and the carry
flag (1 or 0) is rotated to the topmost bit (the most significant bit).
The result is stored in D1. The RCR and RCRP instructions always pass power. When using
the RCR and RCRP instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1
and D1 are not the same type. Specify the same variable type in the S1 and D1 operands.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

S1: Rotation address Specifies an address to rotate bits.

S2: Number of bits to rotate Specifies the number of bits to rotate.
D1: Storage device Specifies an address for storing the results after rotating bits.

For example, When 1 bit is rotated to right (with carry over)

Most significant bit Least significant bit
Information in a carry flag before
Before execution of an instruction
instruction 31 30 29 28 3 2 1 0
execution 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0

After
instruction 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
execution
Information in a carry flag is stored Information in a carry flag after
in the most significant bit. execution of an instruction

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer constant 20
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

When operand D1 is an integer variable and you want to input hexadecimal values in
operands S1 and S2.
When 0x (zero and lower case x) is input, the following values are interpreted as
hexadecimal values.
Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF
Operand S2 Integer constant 0xF
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

Data_1 [0] Array Size = 5

Data_2 [0] Array Size = 5
Number of bits to shift Array specification None

If both S1 and D1 are not an array, 32 bits are rotated with carry over.
For S2, specify a value between 0 and 32.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-307

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

Program Example
RCR

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the RCR instruction will be executed.
When the RCR instruction is executed, the result of rotating 1 bit with carry over is stored
in D1.
(2) When 1 bit is shifted to the right with carry over, you can use #L_CalcCarry to check the
value of the least significant bit before rotation.
(Supplementary) When using a normally open instruction, as long as the bit is ON, the RCR
instruction is always executed.
Most significant bit Least significant bit Information in a carry flag
before execution of an
Before instruction
instruction 31 30 29 28 3 2 1 0
execution 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0

After
instruction 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
execution
Information in a carry flag is stored in the Information in a carry flag after
most significant bit. execution of an instruction

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-308

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
RCRP

The RCRP and RCR instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
RCRP instruction, even when using a normally open instruction, only the upward transition
is detected, and the RCRP instruction is executed. Therefore, the RCRP instruction is
executed only for one scan, even when the bit remains ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-309

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.13 Function Instruction

SUM/SUMP (Total)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
SUM Operation 6 to 10
(Total -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
SUMP Operation 6 to 10
(Total - positive
transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1, S2, D1 for the SUM/SUMP
instructions.
The actual number of steps in the SUM/SUMP instructions depends on the operand
specification method. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

For example, Calculate the number of steps in the SUM/SUMP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {10 = 1 step} + {Result [0] = 2 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-310

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand S1 in the SUM/SUMP
instructions
.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-311

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-312

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand S2 in the SUM/SUMP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-313

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-314

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand D1 in the SUM/SUMP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(Output specified
included) Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-315

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-316

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the SUB and SUMP Instructions

The SUM/SUMP instructions both calculate sums. When the SUM instruction is executed,
S2 array elements beginning at address S1 are totaled and the result is saved to D1. The
SUM/SUMP instructions always pass power. If the variables designated to operands S1 and
D1 are not the same type, an error will occur when using SUM/SUMP instructions.
Designate the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.

Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer Variable (Array) Data_1 [0]
Operand S2 Integer constant 5
Operand D1 Integer variable (Array) Data 2 [0]

When operand D1 is an integer variable and you want to input hexadecimal values in
operand S2.
When 0x (zero and lower case x) is input, the following values are interpreted as
hexadecimal values.
Operand S1 Integer Variable (Array) Data_1 [0]
Operand S2 Integer Constant 0x5
Operand D1 Integer variable (Array) Data 2 [0]

Confirming Execution Results

(1) The instruction will not execute if the value in operand S1 or S2 (infinite or non-numeric
value) cannot be recognized. For the error check, the error code “6706” is set for the
#L_CalcErrCode.
The output result D1 maintains the value from the previous instruction executed
successfully.

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-317

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
SUM
Totals 1 through 5 in Data_1 and saves the total in Data_2.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns on and passes power to the SUM
instruction, it totals 5 data elements in Data_1 beginning with element 0 and stores the
result in D1 (Data_2).When using a normally open instruction, as long as the instruction
is passing power, the SUM instruction continually executes at each scan, performing the
sum operation.

Array Variable Name Data 1 5 Executed Instructions Save in Data 2

Element Data_1[0] + → Data_2 [0]
Data_1 [1] + Data_2 [1]
Data_1 [2] + Data_2 [2]
Data_1 [3] + Data_2 [3]
Data_1 [4] + Data_2 [4]
Data_1 [5] Data_2 [5]
Data_1 [6] Data_2 [6]
Data_1 [7] Data_2 [7]
Data_1 [8] Data_2 [8]
Data_1 [9] Data_2 [9]
Data_1 [10] Data_2 [10]

Program Example
SUMP

(1) The SUMP and SUM instructions differ in how they detect the instruction start. The
SUMP instruction only detects the upward transition and executes the SUMP instruction
even when using a normally open instruction. Even if the variable of the NO instruction
stays ON, the SUMP instruction is executed only once (on the first scan).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-318

Instruction Descriptions

AVE/AVEP (Average)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
AVE Operation 6 to 10
(Average -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
AVEP Operation 6 to 10
(Average - positive
transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1, S2 and D1 for the AVE/
AVEP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the AVE/AVEP instructions depends on the operand
specification method. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 + Number of steps in
operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps in one instruction

For example, Calculate the number of steps in the AVE/AVEP Instructions

(For the number of steps in the operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {10 = 1 step} + {Result [0] = 2 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-319

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand S1 in the AVE/AVEP
instructions.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-320

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-321

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand S2 in the AVE/AVEP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-322

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-323

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand D1 in the AVE/AVEP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(Output specified
included) Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-324

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-325

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the AVE and AVEP Instructions

The AVE/AVEP instructions both calculate the average. When the AVE instruction is
executed, S2 array elements beginning at address S1 are averaged and the result is saved in
D1. The AVE/AVEP instructions always pass power. If the variables designated to operands
S1 and D1 are not the same type, an error will occur when using the AVE/AVEP instructions.
Designate the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.

Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer Variable (Array) Data_1 [0]

Operand S2 Integer Constant 5
Operand D1 Integer Variable (Array) Data_2 [0]

When operand D1 is an integer variable and you want to input hexadecimal values in
operand S2.
When 0x (zero and lower case x) is input, the following values are interpreted as
hexadecimal values.

Operand S1 Integer Variable (Array) Data_1 [0]

Operand S2 Integer Constant 0x5
Operand D1 Integer variable (Array) Data 2 [0]

Confirming Execution Results

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-326

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
AVE
Averages 1 through 5 in Data_1 and saves the result in Data_2.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the AVE instruction will be executed.
When the AVE instruction is executed, the average of array elements 0 through 4 of Data
1 are calculated and the result at D1 is stored in Data_2.
When using a normally-open instruction, as long as the instruction variable is ON, the
AVE instruction is always executed.
Array Variable Data 1 5 Executed Save in Data 2
Name Instructions
Element Data_1[0] + → Data_2 [0]
Data_1 [1] + Data_2 [1]
Data_1 [2] + divide by 5 Data_2 [2]
Data_1 [3] + Data_2 [3]
Data_1 [4] + Data_2 [4]
Data_1 [5] Data_2 [5]
Data_1 [6] Data_2 [6]
Data_1 [7] Data_2 [7]
Data_1 [8] Data_2 [8]
Data_1 [9] Data_2 [9]
Data_1 [10] Data_2 [10]

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-327

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
AVEP

(1) AVEP and AVE instructions differ in how they detect the instruction start. The AVEP
only detects the upward transition and executes the AVEP instruction even when using a
normally open instruction. Even if the variable of the NO instruction stays ON, the AVEP
instruction is executed only once (on the first scan).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-328

Instruction Descriptions

SQRT/SQRTP (Square Root)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
SQRT Operation 3 to 7
(Square Root -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
SQRTP Operation 3 to 7
(Square Root - positive
transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1 and D1) in the SQRT/
SQRTP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the SQRT/SQRTP instructions depends on the operand
specification method. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in the instruction.

For example, Calculate the number of steps in the SQRT/SQRTP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-329

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1 and D1) in the SQRT/
SQRTP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-330

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real Real Variable 1 O
Format Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
(Cannot use Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
for D1) ±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-331

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the SQRT and SQRTP Instructions

The SQRT/SQRTP instructions both calculate the square root. When the SQRT instruction is
executed, the square root of S1 is calculated and the value is saved in D1.
The SQRT/SQRTP instructions always pass power. If the variables designated in operands
S1 and D1 are not the same type, an error will occur when using the SQRT/SQRTP
instructions. Designate the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.

Operand S1 Float constant 0.11

Operand D1 Float variable OUT1

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values are interpreted as real values.

Operand S1 Real constant 0.11

Operand D1 Real variable OUT2

When calculating data in a specified array, specify the array with Data [0] or Data [N] (N is
an integer variable).
When operands S1 and D1 specify the entire array, an error will occur even if the variables
are the same type.
Data_1 Array size = 5
Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results in an
error.

Data_1 [0] Array Size = 5

Result [N] Array Size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables in the
array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-332

Instruction Descriptions

Confirming Execution Results

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
SQRT

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the SQRT instruction will be executed.
When the SQRT instruction is executed, the square root of Data_A is stored in the
calculation result (real/float variable) in D1.
When using a normally-open instruction, as long as the instruction variable is ON, the
SQRT instruction is always executed.

Program Example
SQRTP

(1) The SQRTP and SQRT instructions differ in how they detect the instruction start. The
SQRTP only detects the upward transition and executes the SQRTP instruction even when
using a normally open instruction. Even if the variable of the NO instruction stays ON,
the SQRTP instruction is executed only once (on the first scan).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-333

Instruction Descriptions

BCNT/BCNTP (Bit Count)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
BCNT Operation 3 to 9
(Bit Count -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
BCNTP Operation 3 to 9
(Bit Count -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the BCNT/
BCNTP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the BCNT/BCNTP instructions depends on the operand
specification method. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

For example, Calculate the number of steps in the BCNT/BCNTP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 [1] = 2 steps} + {Result [Specify indirectly] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-334

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following table list the configurable conditions for Operands (S1 and D1) in the BCNT/
BCNTP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
∗(Note 1)
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
S1 = IO
Enabled Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
D1 = IO ∗(Notes 1) specified
Disabled Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer 3 O
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer 4 O
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-335

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
∗(Note 1)
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
S1 = IO
Enabled Real ⎯ ⎯ X
D1 = IO Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Disabled Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
∗(Notes 2)
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D1 =
Disabled I_∗(Notes 2) ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-336

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
∗(Notes 3) ∗(Notes 3)
D1 = Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
Disabled ±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

Explanation of the BCNT and BCNTP Instructions

The BCNT/BCNTP instructions both count bits. When the BCNT instruction is executed, the
ON bits in S1 data are counted and the number of ON bits is saved in D1. The BCNT/
BCNTP instructions always pass power. If the variables designated to operands S1 and D1
are not the same type, an error will occur when using the BCNT/BCNTP instructions.
Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer Constant 10

Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

Operand S1 Integer Constant 0xFF

Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

When calculating data in a specified array (integer variable array), use Data [0] or Data [N]
(N is an integer variable) to specify the array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-337

Instruction Descriptions

Data_1 [0] Array Size = 5

Result [N] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables in the
array.

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
BCNT
Counts the number of bits that are ON, and saves the number in an integer variable.

When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the BCNT instruction will be executed.
When the BCNT instruction is executed, the ON bits in the value 10 (binary 1010) are
counted and the result of 2 is saved in the result data. The result data is configured in D1.
When using a normally-open instruction, as long as the instruction variable is ON, the
BCNT instruction is always executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-338

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
BCNTP

(1) The BCNTP and BCNT instructions differ in how they detect the instruction start, The
BCNTP only detects the upward transition and executes the BCNTP instruction even
when using a normally open instruction. Even if the variable of the NO instruction stays
ON, the BCNTP instruction is executed only once (on the first scan).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-339

Instruction Descriptions

PID
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
PID HP Operation 10 to 18
(PID - Level Sensitive)

Explanation of the PID Instruction

The PID variable in the PID instruction is a structure variable. You cannot allocate variables
other than PID variables (address format: U_) to operand HP. For the internal structure of the
PID variable designated to operand HP, refer to the following table.

PID Variable
PID Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.Q Bit Variable PID Instruction Processing
Completion Flag
VariableName.PF Bit Variable Processing Deadband Range Flag
VariableName.UO Bit Variable Output Values over the Upper
Limit
VariableName.TO Bit Variable Output Values over the Lower
Limit
VariableName.IF Bit Variable Integral Setting
VariableName.KP Integer Variable Proportional Constant
VariableName.TR Integer Variable Integral Calculus Time
VariableName.TD Integer Variable Differential Calculus Time
VariableName.PA Integer Variable Processing Deadband Range
VariableName.BA Integer Variable Bias (Offset)
VariableName.ST Integer Variable Frequency in Sampling
Other operands are as follows.
S1: Setpoint
S2: Preset Value
S3: Tieback Value (The set value is output when an instruction is disabled)
D1: Output Value

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-340

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1, S2, S3, and D1 for the PID
instruction. The actual number of steps in the PID instruction depends on the operand
specification method. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number steps in HP operand + Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand
S2 + Number of steps in operand S3 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 5 = Total number of
steps in one instruction

For example, Calculate the number of steps in the PID instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{PID control = 1 step (PID variable in HP operand is fixed to 1 step)} + {Current value = 1
step} + {Setting = 1 step} + {Tieback value [N] = 3 steps} + {Output = 1 step} + {5 steps} =
12 steps

The last 5 steps are included in the PID instruction. Be sure to add 5 steps.

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2, S3, and D1) in the PID
instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-341

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
∗(Note 1)
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
S1, S2, S3
= IO possible Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
D1 = IO ∗(Notes 1) specified
Disabled Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-342

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
∗(Notes 2)
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D1 = Not
possible I_∗(Notes 2) ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
∗(Notes 3) ∗(Notes 3)
D1, S2 = Not Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
possible ±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-343

Instruction Descriptions

Basic Function
The PID instruction compares the measured values (current values) and the set values (target
values). The measured values are based on analog input and temperature input. The
instruction then adjusts the output values to even the gap between the current values and the
target values. You can combine P control, I control, and D control in PID control. Specify
each below mentioned parameter to be controlled.
The output value calculated by the PID control is generally expressed by the following
formula.
∫0 ( E ) dt
t
CV = KP(E+Reset + Rate d(E) )
dt
KP: Proportional constant
E: Deviation (SP-PV or PV-SP)
Reset:Integral Cycles
Rate: Differential calculus time

Using the [Tuning] tab that will be described later, adjust the sampling time to reduce the
effect of noise on deviation. The following formula shows the result of filtering on the
deviation.
T
EFn = EFn-1 + TLoop (En−EFn-1)
Filter
EF : Result of filtering on deviation
Tloop: Frequency data
TFilter:Sampling Frequency
E: Deviation (SP-PV or PV-SP)

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-344

Instruction Descriptions

Function Summary
When the PID instruction is enabled, the PID is calculated and the operation volume is
adjusted and output (calculated). When the instruction is disabled as below, it outputs the
Tieback value. The Tieback value is specified in S3. Input the constant 0 if no output is
necessary when the instruction is disabled.

To use the PID instruction in a logic program, allocate variables to the PID variable operand
(HP) and the integer variable operands (S1, S2, S3 and D1) first.

PID Variable
When you allocate a variable to the PID instruction operand HP, a member is automatically
allocated to the variable.

PID Variable
PID Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.Q Bit Variable PID Instruction Processing Completion Flag
VariableName.PF Bit Variable Processing Deadband Range Flag
VariableName.UO Bit Variable Output Values over the Upper Limit
VariableName.TO Bit Variable Output Values over the Lower Limit
VariableName.IF Bit Variable Integral Setting
VariableName.KP Integer Variable Proportional Constant
VariableName.TR Integer Variable Integral Calculus Time
VariableName.TD Integer Variable Differential Calculus Time
VariableName.PA Integer Variable Processing Deadband Range
VariableName.BA Integer Variable Bias (Offset)
VariableName.ST Integer Variable Frequency in Sampling

• Values assigned to a proportional constant, integral calculus time, and differential calculus
time look different when input in "PID Monitor" from when input to each of the PID
variables in a program. When inputting the values in the program, multiply the values by
1000 for the proportional constant, the integral calculus times and the differential calculus
times.
For example Proportional constant 0.1 x 1000 -> 100 -> 100

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-345

Instruction Descriptions

(Notes)
All the PID variables are keep-type variables. Up to 8 PID instructions are allowed per
project.
1 PID instruction can be specified for 1 PID variable.
Explanation of the PID Variable Members

PID Instruction Processing Completion Flag (VariableName.Q)

Upon the value being output to the operand D1 after the processing, .Q turns on. The
completion flag of the PID instruction turns on while 1 scan is being executed.

PID Instruction Processing Processing

1 Bit

Output Sampling

Processing Deadband Range Flag (VariableName.PF)

The flag turns on when the current value reaches the target value within the range specified
by specifying PID variables (process invalid range VariableName.PF) and turns off when the
current value becomes out of range.

Target Value

PID Processing
Deadband Range

PID Processing
Deadband Range Flag
(VariableName.PF) Sampling

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-346

Instruction Descriptions

Output Values over the Upper/Lower Limits (VariableName.UO, VariableName.TO)

Double-click the PID instruction to display a dialog box for specifying the PID variable
output range. If the calculated result exceeds the specified output value, the
VariableName.UO turns ON. When the result is below the specified lower limit, the
VariableName.TO turns ON. The PID continues even when the status bits turn ON and the
calculated value is output as either the specified upper or lower limit.
Scaled Maximum Value

Scaled Minimum Value

Output Limit Range

VariableName.UO

VariableName.TO
Sampling
When the value is within the range, the VariableName.TO will not turn ON.

Integral Setting (variable name .IF)

Double-click the PID instruction to display a dialog box for setting a range to execute the
PID instruction. If the result is out of the integral setting specified, the .IF turns on. The
integral setting of each status executes integral calculation only within the range.

Proportional Constant (VariableName.KP)

Specify a proportional constant (VariableName.KP) to output a value corresponding to the
deviation between the target and current values.
A smaller proportional constant produces a smaller output value to reach the target value, and
eliminates overshoot but may increase the residual deviation. A larger proportional constant
produces a larger output value to reach the target value and reduces the time to reach the
target, but may result in hunting.

Settings range from 0.01 to 1000.00 Internal data are integer variables. Decimals cannot be
used.
To set 0.01, specify 0.01 x 1000 = 10.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-347

Instruction Descriptions

Specify variable.KP as the value multiplied by 1000.

When the proportional constant is large

Target Value
Deviation
Residual Deviation

When the proportional constant is small

Sampling

(Note) In the proportional control, the operation volume will be the maximum 100% if the
current value is smaller than the target value. The operation value will be 0% if the target
value and the current value match (no deviation).
Operation Volume*

ON
100%

OFF
0

Target Value Current Value

* Operation Volume: Output per unit time

Integral Calculus Time (VariableName.TR)

By setting the integral calculus time (.TR), you can eliminate a deviation to the target value.
As the operation volume approaches the target value using proportional control, the deviation
becomes so small that the operation volume cannot obtain enough values to offset the
deviation. The slight deviation is called a residual deviation. The deviation can be eliminated
by the integral control. The integral control adjusts the deviation by increasing the operation
volume when the deviation accumulated timewise reaches a certain size. As the integral
calculus time becomes short, the operation volume to reach the target value becomes larger,
causing overshoot and hunting and reaching the target in a shorter time. Likewise, as the
integral calculus time becomes longer, the operation volume to reach the target value
becomes smaller, reducing overshoot and hunting, but it takes longer to reach the target.
The integral calculus time specifies an interval time (in seconds) for executing integral
processing.

Settings range from 0.100 to 3000.000 Internal data are integer variables. Decimals cannot
be used.
To set 0.1, specify 0.1 x 1000 = 100.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-348

Instruction Descriptions

Specify variable.TR as the value multiplied by 1000.

For shorter integral calculus time

Target Value

For longer integral calculus time

Sampling

Differential Calculus Time (VariableName.TD)

By setting the differential calculus time (.TD), you can respond to any change quickly.
The proportional control and integral control require a certain amount of time (time constant)
and cannot respond immediately to external disturbances. It takes time to return to the
original target value. The differential control responds promptly and assigns a large operation
volume when the gap between the current and previous deviations is large compared to the
external disturbance. A longer differential calculus time requires shorter time to recover from
the effects of external disturbances, but results in overshoot and frequent hunting. A shorter
differential calculus time reduces overshoot and hunting but takes more time to recover from
the effects of external disturbances.
When the differential calculus time is long

Target Value

When the differential calculus time is short

Sampling

The setting range 0.00 to 3000.00 internal data becomes integer variables and decimals
become unavailable.
For setting 0.1, use 0.1 x 1000 =100.
Specify the value multiplied by 1000 for the variable name .TD.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-349

Instruction Descriptions

Processing Deadband Range (VariableName.PA)

In the "processing deadband range," PID control does not occur and the minimum value is
output for smooth control without hunting.

Target Value

PID Processing Deadband Range

Sampling

Bias (VariableName.BA)
Sets the bias value (offset). This reduces any residual deviation incurred in the proportional
control.

When the bias value is specified

Target Value

Residual Deviation
When the bias value is not
specified

Sampling

Operation Volume*
When the bias value is specified

100%

When the bias value is not

specified
0
Target Value Current Value

* Operation Volume: Output per unit time

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-350

Instruction Descriptions

Sampling Frequency (VariableName.ST)

This eliminates noise in the S2 value obtained in the control setting frequency. The moving
average is calculated based on the previous filtering result and the newly obtained data.
Specifying the sampling frequency minimizes the effect on the output value when the current
data contain unexpected values. This is because the average of the previously measured data
and the current data is used for the calculation. Specify a larger value than the control setting
frequency for the sampling frequency. Specify 0 for the sampling frequency to disable the
filter.
Set Up by Double-clicking the PID Instruction
Double-click the PID instruction to specify the PID variables.

Output Setting (Range of Operand D1)

Specifies the upper and lower limits for the output value. The result of the calculation must
be within this range.

Fixed Settings The Output range is 0 to 4095.

User Settings Specify the output range as required.
Range for the Upper Limit Lower Limit +1 to 32767
Range for the Lower Limit 0 to Upper Limit−1

Integral Setting
Specifies the upper and lower limits for the integral settings.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-351

Instruction Descriptions

Control Setting
Loop Update Time: Sets the temporal frequency of obtaining S2 data. The frequency of
obtaining data is also the frequency of updating the D1 output.
You can use the filtering feature to specify the frequency. The sampling frequency must be
larger than the frequency of obtaining data.
Settings range from 10 to 65535 ms

Action:
Direct (D1−D2)
Used to control the increase in operation volume when the process variable is smaller than
the setpoint. (heating, and so on)

Target Value

Sampling

Reverse (D1−D2)
Used to control the increase in operation volume when the process variable is larger than the
setpoint, such as cooling.

Target Value

Sampling

Filter Settings
Specifies the upper and lower limits for the output value. If the value exceeds the range, the
value will be output as either the upper or lower limit. When the value exceeds the range, the
bits above the upper and lower limits (VariableName.UO, VariableName.TO) turn ON.
Settings Range Dependent on the Output Settings Range
Upper Limit Output Settings Range (upper limit) to 32767
Lower Limit Output Settings Range (lower limit) to −32768

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-352

Instruction Descriptions

PID Constant Adjust

The following explanation uses temperature control as an example. To optimize the result of
the PID control, you need to optimize the constant values of P (proportional element), I
(Integral element), and D (differential element). You can use the step-response method to
derive a PID temperature constant for various setpoints. Note that the value might not be
optimized depending on the use and the setpoint. In that case, perform online monitoring and
adjust the value in the PID monitor window. Specify the setpoint value for the step-response
method and output 100% of the operation volume onto the control target step. At this time,
measure the maximum temperature inclination (R) and lost time (L) in the temperature graph
shown below.

Operation
Volume Sampling

Maximum
Temperature
Inclination (R)
R = Variation/t
Variation (%)

Time (minute)
Lost Time (L)

Insert the measured values for maximum temperature slope (R) and lost time (L) in the
following formula to calculate the proportional constant, integral calculus time, and
differential calculus time constants. Assign the calculated values to the values in the PID
monitor window.
"Proportional Constant" = 100/(0.83 . R . L) [%]
"Integral Calculus Time" = 1/(2 . L) [events/min] (formula = unidentified)
"Differential Calculus Time" = 0.5 . L [min]

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-353

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.14 Function Instruction

SIN and SINP (Sine)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
SIN Trigonometric 3 to 7
(Sine - Function
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
SINP Trigonometric 3 to 7
(Sine - positive transition) Function

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the SIN and SINP
instructions.
The actual number of steps in the SIN and SINP instructions depends on the specified
operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in SIN and SINP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-354

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1) and (D1).

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real Real Variable 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-355

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Format Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
(Cannot use Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
for D1) ±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-356

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the SIN and SINP Instructions

The SIN and SINP instructions are sine instructions for trigonometric functions. The SIN
instruction calculates the sine of S1 and stores the result in D1.
Enter the number of radians in S1 to get the result in D1 as a real value between −1.0 and 1.0.
The SIN and SINP instructions always pass power. When using the SIN and SINP
instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 are not the
same type. Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.

Operand S1 Float constant 0.11

Operand D1 Float variable OUT1

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values become real values.

Operand S1 Real constant 0.11

Operand D1 Real variable OUT2

Data_1 Array size = 5

Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results in an
error.

Data_1 [0] Array Size = 5

Result [N] Array Size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables in the
array.

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

(Notes)
When checking the result using system variables, make sure the check takes place after the
instruction has been executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-357

Instruction Descriptions

When checking the state after multiple instructions have been executed, system variables will
store the result only of the last processed instruction.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-358

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
SIN

(1) The SIN instruction is executed when the positive transition instruction turns ON. The
SIN instruction calculates the sine of Data_A and stores the result in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the SIN instruction is always executed as long as
the normally open instruction is ON.

Program Example
SINP

(1) SINP and SIN instructions differ in when they run. In SINP instructions, Even when using
a normally open instruction, the SINP instruction executes only when it detects the
upward transition. Therefore, the SINP instruction is executed only for one scan, even
when the normally open instruction bit remains turn ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-359

Instruction Descriptions

COS and COSP (Cosine)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
COS Trigonometric 3 to 7
(Cosine - Function
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
COSP Trigonometric 3 to 7
(Cosine - positive Function
transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the COS and
COSP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the COS and COSP instructions depends on the specified
operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in COS and COSP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-360

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the COS and
COSP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-361

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-362

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the COS and COSP Instructions

The COS and COSP instructions are cosine instructions for trigonometric functions. The
COS instruction calculates the cosine of S1 and stores the result in D1. Enter the number of
radians in S1 to get the result in D1 as a real value between −1.0 and 1.0.
The COS and COSP instructions are always conducted. When using the COS and COSP
instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 are not the
same type. Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.

Operand S1 Float constant 0.11

Operand D1 Float variable OUT1

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values become real values.

Operand S1 Real constant 0.11

Operand D1 Real variable OUT2

Data_1 Array size = 5

Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results in an
error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [N] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables in the
array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-363

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
COS

(1) The COS instruction is executed when the positive transition instruction turns ON. The
COS instruction calculates the cosine of Data_A and stores the result in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the COS instruction is always executed as long
as the normally open instruction bit is ON.

Program Example
COSP

(1) The COSP and COS instructions differ in when they run. In COSP instructions, Even
when using a normally open instruction, the COSP instruction executes only when it
detects the upward transition. Therefore, the COSP instruction is executed only for one
scan, even when the normally open instruction bit remains ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-364

Instruction Descriptions

TAN and TANP (Tangent)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
TAN Trigonometric 3 to 7
(Tangent - Function
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
TANP Trigonometric 3 to 7
(Tangent - positive Function
transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the TAN and
TANP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the TAN and TANP instructions depends on the specified
operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in TAN and TANP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-365

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the TAN and
TANP instructions
.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer variable[constant/ ⎯ X
variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real Real Variable 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-366

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Format Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-367

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the TAN and TANP Instructions

TAN and TANP instructions are tangent instructions for trigonometric functions. When the
TAN instruction is executed and passes power, the value in S1 is TANed and the result is
stored in D1. The S1 value is defined in radians and the D1 value results in a floating point
number and should be set up with a real or float variable.
The TAN and TANP instructions always pass power. When using the TAN and TANP
instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 are not the
same type. Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.

Operand S1 Float constant 0.11

Operand D1 Float variable OUT1

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values become real values.

Operand S1 Real constant 0.11

D1 Operand Real variable OUT2

When calculating data in a specified array, specify the array with Data [0] or Data [N] (N is
an integer variable).
When operands S1 and D1 specify the entire array, an error will occur even if the specified
variables are the same type.
Data_1 Array size = 5
Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results in an
error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [N] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables in the
array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-368

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
TAN

(1) The TAN instruction is executed when the positive transition instruction turns ON. The
TAN instruction calculates the tangent of Data_A and stores the result in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the TAN instruction is always executed as long
as the normally open instruction bit is ON.

Program Example
TANP

(1) TANP and TAN instructions differ in when they run. In TANP instructions, even when
using a normally open instruction, the TANP instruction executes only when it detects the
upward transition. Therefore, the TANP instruction is executed only for one scan, even
when the normally open instruction bit remains ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-369

Instruction Descriptions

ASIN and ASINP (Arc Sine)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
ASIN Trigonometric 3 to 7
(Arc Sine - Function
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
ASINP Trigonometric 3 to 7
(Arc Sine - positive Function
transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the ASIN and
ASINP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the ASIN and ASINP instructions depends on the specified
operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in ASIN and ASINP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-370

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the ASIN and
ASINP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real Real Variable 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-371

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
(Cannot use Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
for D1) ±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-372

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the ASIN and ASINP Instructions

The ASIN and ASINP instructions are arc sine instructions for trigonometric functions. The
ASIN instruction calculates the arc sine of S1 and stores the result in D1. Sin−1(S1) is stored
in D1. Enter a value between −1.0 and 1.0 for S1. The result in D1 is shown in radians as a
real value between −ÉŒ /2 and 1ÉŒ /2. ÉŒ is approximately 3.1415926535897 (real
number).
The ASIN and ASINP instructions are always conducted. When using the ASIN and ASINP
instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 are not the
same type. Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.

Operand S1 Float constant 0.11

Operand D1 Float variable OUT1

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values become real values.

Operand S1 Real constant 0.11

Operand D1 Real variable OUT2

Data_1 Array size = 5

Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [N] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables in
the array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-373

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
ASIN

(1) The ASIN instruction is executed when the positive transition instruction turns ON. The
ASIN instruction calculates the arc sine of Data_A and stores the result in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the ASIN instruction is always executed as long
as the normally open instruction bit is ON.

Program Example
ASINP

(1) ASINP and ASIN instructions differ in when they run. In ASINP instructions, even when
using a normally open instruction, only the positive transition is detected and the ASINP
instruction is executed. Therefore, the ASINP instruction is executed only for one scan,
even when the normally open instruction bit remains ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-374

Instruction Descriptions

ACOS and ACOSP (Arc Cosine)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
ACOS Trigonometric 3 to 7
(Arc Cosine - Function
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
ACOSP Trigonometric 3 to 7
(Arc Cosine - positive Function
transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the ACOS and
ACOSP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the ACOS and ACOSP instructions depends on the specified
operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in ACOS and ACOSP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-375

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the ACOS and
ACOSP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-376

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Format Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
(Cannot use Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
for D1) ±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-377

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the ACOS and ACOSP Instructions

ACOS and ACOSP instructions are arc cosine instructions for trigonometric functions. When
the ACOS instruction is executed and passes power, the S1 value is ACOSed and the result
[COS−1 (S1)] is stored in D1. Input values between −1.0 to 1.0 for S1, and the result in D1 is
a real number, measured in radians, between 0 and Pi. Pi is approximately 3.1415926535897
(real number).
The ACOS and ACOSP instructions are always conducted. When using the ACOS and
ACOSP instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 are
not the same type. Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.
Operand S1 Float constant 0.11
Operand D1 Float variable OUT1

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values become real values.
Operand S1 Real constant 0.11
Operand D1 Real variable OUT2

Data_1 Array size = 5

Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [N] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables in
the array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-378

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
ACOS

(1) The ACOS instruction is executed when the positive transition instruction turns ON. The
ACOS instruction calculates the arc cosine of Data_A and stores the result in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the ACOS instruction is always executed as long
as the normally open instruction bit ON.

Program Example
ACOSP

(1) ACOSP and ACOS instructions differ in when they run. In ACOSP instructions, even
when using a normally open instruction, the ACOSP instruction executes only when it
detects the upward transition. Therefore, the ACOSP instruction is executed only for one
scan, even when the normally open instruction bit remains ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-379

Instruction Descriptions

ATAN and ATANP (Arc Tangent)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
ATAN Trigonometric 3 to 7
(Arc Tangent - Function
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
ATANP Trigonometric 3 to 7
(Arc Tangent - positive Function
transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the ATAN and
ATANP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the ATAN and ATANP instructions depends on the specified
operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in ATAN and ATANP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-380

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the ATAN and
ATANP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-381

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Format Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
(Cannot use Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
for D1) ±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-382

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the ATAN and ATANP Instructions

ATAN and ATANP instructions are arc tangent instructions for trigonometric functions.
When the ATAN instruction is executed and passes power, the S1 value is ATANed and the
result [TAN−1 (S1)] is stored in D1. Input values between −1.0 and 1.0 for S1, and the result
in D1 is a real number, measured in radians, between −Pi/2 to Pi/2. Pi is approximately
3.1415926535897 (real number).
The ATAN and ATANP instructions are always conducted. When using the ATAN and
ATANP instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 are
not the same type. Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.
Operand S1 Float constant 0.11
Operand D1 Float variable OUT1

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values become real values.
Operand S1 Real constant 0.11
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

Data_1 Array Size = 5

Result Array Size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [N] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables in
the array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-383

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
ATAN

(1) The ATAN instruction will be executed when the positive transition instruction turns ON.
The ATAN instruction calculates the arc tangent of Data_A and stores the result in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the ATAN instruction is always executed as long
as the normally open instruction bit remains ON.

Program Example
ATANP

(1) ATANP and ATAN instructions differ in when they run. In ATANP instructions, even
when using a normally open instruction, the ATANP instruction executes only when it
detects the upward transition. Therefore, the ATANP instruction is executed only for one
scan, even when the normally open instruction bit remains ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-384

Instruction Descriptions

COT and COTP (Cotangent)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
COT Trigonometric 3 to 7
(Cotangent - Function
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
COTP Trigonometric 3 to 7
(Cotangent - positive Function
transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the COT and
COTP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the COT and COTP instructions depends on the specified
operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in COT and COTP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-385

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the COT and
COTP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-386

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Format Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
(Cannot use Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
for D1) ±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-387

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the COT and COTP Instructions

COT and COTP instructions are cotangent instructions for trigonometric functions. When the
COT instruction is executed and passes power, the S1 value is COTed and the result [1/tan
(S1)] is stored in D1. Input the number of radians in S1. The closer S1 is to a multiple of Pi
results in a larger absolute value in D1, which can be expressed as a real number with a range
of +/-2.225e−308 to +/-1.79e+308.
Pi is approximately 3.1415926535897 (real number).COT and COTP instructions always
pass power. When using COT and COTP instructions, specify the same data type in operands
S1 and D1 to avoid errors.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.
Operand S1 Float constant 0.11
Operand D1 Float variable OUT1

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values become real values.
Operand S1 Real constant 0.11
Operand D1 Real variable OUT2

Data_1 Array size = 5

Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [N] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables in
the array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-388

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
COT

(1) The COT instruction is executed when the positive transition instruction turns ON. The
COT instruction calculates the cotangent of Data_A and stores the result in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the COT instruction is always executed as long
as the normally open instruction bit is ON.

Program Example
COTP

(1) COTP and COT instructions differ in when they run. In COTP instructions, even when
using a normally open instruction, the COTP instruction executes only when it detects the
upward transition. Therefore, the COTP instruction is executed only for one scan, even
when the normally open instruction bit remains ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-389

Instruction Descriptions

EXP and EXPP (Exponential)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
EXP Other 3 to 7
(Exponent - Function
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
EXPP Other 3 to 7
(Exponent - positive Function
transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the EXP and
EXPP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the EXP and EXPP instructions depends on the specified
operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in EXP and EXPP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-390

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the EXP and
EXPP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-391

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Format Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
(Cannot use Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
for D1) ±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-392

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of EXP and EXPP Instructions

The EXP and EXPP instructions are exponential instructions. The EXP instruction calculates
the exponent of S1 and stores the result in D1.
The exponent of S1 is stored in D1. e to the power of S1 is output as a real value to D1.
Operation expression: D1 = eS1 e is approximately 2.7182818284590 (real number).

The EXP and EXPP instructions are always conducted. When using the EXP and EXPP
instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 are not the
same type. Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.
Operand S1 Float constant 0.11
Operand D1 Float variable OUT1

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values become real values.
Operand S1 Real constant 0.11
Operand D1 Real variable OUT2

Data_1 Array size = 5

Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [N] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables in
the array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-393

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
EXP

(1) The EXP instruction is executed when the positive transition instruction turns ON. The
EXP instruction calculates the exponent of Data_A and stores the result in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the EXP instruction is always executed as long
as the normally open instruction bit ON.

Program Example
EXPP

(1) The EXPP and EXP instructions differ in when they run. In EXPP instructions, even when
using a normally open instruction, the EXPP instruction executes only when it detects the
upward transition. Therefore, the EXPP instruction is executed only for one scan, even
when the normally open instruction bit remains ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-394

Instruction Descriptions

LN and LNP (Logarithm)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
LN Other 3 to 7
(Logarithm - Function
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
LNP Other 3 to 7
(Logarithm - positive Function
transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the LN and LNP
instructions.
The actual number of steps in the LN and LNP instructions depends on the specified operand.
The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in LN and LNP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-395

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the LN and LNP
instructions
.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real Real Variable 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-396

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Format Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
(Cannot use Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
for D1) ±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-397

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the LN and LNP Instructions

The LN and LNP instructions are logarithmic instructions. The LN instruction calculates the
natural logarithmic function of S1 and stores the result in D1. The result in D1 is output as a
real value where e raised to the power of D1 equals S1.
Operation expression: D1 = loge S1 e is approximately 2.7182818284590 (real number).
The LN and LNP instructions are always conducted. When using the LN and LNP
instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 are not the
same type. Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.
Operand S1 Float constant 0.11
Operand D1 Float variable OUT1

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values become real values.
Operand S1 Real constant 0.11
Operand D1 Real variable OUT2

Data_1 Array size = 5

Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [N] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables
in the array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-398

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
LN

(1) The LN instruction is executed when the positive transition instruction turns ON. The LN
instruction calculates the natural logarithmic function of Data_A and stores the result in
D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the LN instruction is always executed as long as
the normally open instruction bit is ON.

Program Example
LNP

(1) The LNP and LN instructions differ in when they run. In the LNP instructions, even when
using a normally open instruction, the LNP instruction executes only when it detects the
upward transition. Therefore, the LNP instruction is executed only for one scan, even
when the normally open instruction bit remains ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-399

Instruction Descriptions

LG10 and LG10P (Log Base 10)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
LG10 Other Function 3 to 7
(Log Base 10 -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
LG10P Other Function 3 to 7
(Log Base 10 - positive
transition)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the LG10 and
LG10P instructions.
The actual number of steps in the LG10 and LG10P instructions depends on the specified
operand. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in LG10 and LG10P instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-400

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and D1 for the LG10 and
LG10P instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer variable[constant/ ⎯ X
variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real Real Variable 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-401

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Format Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
(Cannot use Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
for D1) ±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-402

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of LG10 and LG10P Instructions

The LG10 and LG10P instructions are logarithmic instructions. The LG10 instruction
calculates the common logarithm function of S1 and stores the result in D1.
For the result in D1, the result of log10 S1 is output as a real value.
Equation: D1 = log10 S1
The LG10 and LG10P instructions are always conducted. When using the LG10 and LG10P
instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 are not the
same type. Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.
Operand S1 Float constant 0.11
Operand D1 Float variable OUT1

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values become real values.
Operand S1 Real constant 0.11
Operand D1 Real variable OUT2

Data_1 Array size = 5

Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [N] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables in
the array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-403

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
LG10

(1) The LG10 instruction is executed when the positive transition instruction turns ON. The
LG10 instruction calculates the common logarithm function of Data_A and stores the
result in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the LG10 instruction is always executed as long
as normally open instruction bit is ON.

Program Example
LG10P

(1) The LG10P and LG10 instructions differ in when they run. In the LG10P instructions,
even when using a normally open instruction, the LG10P instruction executes only when
it detects the upward transition. Therefore, the LG10P instruction is executed only for one
scan, even when the normally open instruction bit remains ON.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-404

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.15 Compare Instruction (Arithmetic)

EQ (=)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
EQ Comparison 3 to 9
(Equal To -
Level Sensitive)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and S2 for the EQ instruction.
The actual number of steps in the EQ instruction depends on the specified operand. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in EQ instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Data_2 [0] = 2 steps} + {1 step} = 4 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-405

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and S2 for the EQ instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer 3 O
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer 4 O
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real ⎯ 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-406

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Format Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-407

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the EQ Instruction

The EQ instruction is a compare instruction. The EQ instruction compares S1 with S2 and if
the result of the comparison is S1 = S2, the instruction passes power. Be careful when
comparing real values. For example, if the operand value is 1.99999999999, it is not equal to
2.00000000000.
When using the EQ instruction, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1
and S2 are not the same type. Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and S2.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand S1 or S2 is an integer constant

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer variable Data_1

When entering hexadecimal values in operands S1 and S2

When 0x (zero and lower case "x") is input, the following values become hexadecimal
values.

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF

Operand S2 Integer variable Data_1

When entering float constants in operands S1 and S2

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.

Operand S1 Float constant 0.11

Operand S2 Float variable Data_1

When entering real constants in operands S1 and S2

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values become real values.

Operand S1 Real constant 0.11

Operand S2 Real variable Data_1

When comparing data in a specified array (integer variable array) Specify the array using
Data[0] or Data[N] (N indicates an integer variable).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-408

Instruction Descriptions

You cannot specify entire arrays for operands S1 or S2. An error will occur even if the
specified array variables are the same type.

Data_1 Array size = 5

Data_2 Array Size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results in an
error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Data_2 [N] Array Size = 5
Compare processing is performed only on individually
specified array elements.

Program Example
EQ
Compares integer variables and outputs the result in D1.

(1)Data_A and the operation result are compared to determine whether they are equal. If the
result of the EQ instruction is S1 = S2, the EQ instruction passes power, then the
instruction to the right of the EQ instruction is executed. In the above diagram, it's the
MOV instruction.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-409

Instruction Descriptions

GT (>)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
GT Comparison 3 to 9
(Greater Than - Level
Sensitive)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and S2 for the GT instruction.
The actual number of steps in the GT instruction depends on the specified operand. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in GT instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Data_2 [0] = 2 steps} + {1 step} = 4 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-410

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and S2 for the GT instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer 3 O
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer variable[constant/ 4 O
variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real Real Variable 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-411

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-412

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the GT Instruction

The GT instruction is a compare instruction. The GT instruction compares S1 with S2. If the
result of the comparison is S1 > S2, the instruction passes power. Be careful when comparing
real values. For example, if the operand value is 2.000000000001, it is still greater than 2.
When using the GT instruction, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1
and S2 are not the same type. Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and S2.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand S1 or S2 is an integer constant

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer variable Data_1

When entering hexadecimal values in operands S1 and S2

When 0x (zero and lower case "x") is input, the following values become hexadecimal
values.

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF

Operand S2 Integer variable Data_1

When entering float constants in operands S1 and S2

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.

Operand S1 Float constant 0.11

Operand S2 Float variable Data_1

When entering real constants in operands S1 and S2

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values become real values.

Operand S1 Real constant 0.11

Operand S2 Real variable Data_1

When comparing data in a specified array (integer variable array) Specify the array using
Data[0] or Data[N] (N indicates an integer variable).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-413

Instruction Descriptions

You cannot specify entire arrays for operands S1 or S2. An error will occur even if the
specified array variables are the same type.

Data_1 Array size = 5

Data_2 Array Size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results in
an error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Data_2 [N] Array Size = 5
Compare processing is performed only on individually
specified array elements.

Program Example
GT
Compares integer variables and outputs the result in D1.

(1)Data_A and the operation result are compared to determine whether Data_A is greater
than the operation result. If the result of the GT instruction is S1 > S2, the GT instruction
passes power. Then the instruction to the right of the GT instruction is executed. In the
above diagram, it's the MOV instruction.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-414

Instruction Descriptions

LT (<)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
LT Comparison 3 to 9
(Less Than -
Level Sensitive)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and S2 for the LT instruction.
The actual number of steps in the LT instruction depends on the specified operand. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in LT instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Data_2 [0] = 2 steps} + {1 step} = 4 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-415

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and S2 for the LT instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer 3 O
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer variable[constant/ 4 O
variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real Real Variable 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-416

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-417

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the LT Instruction

The LT instruction is a compare instruction. The LT instruction compares S1 with S2. If the
result of the comparison is S1 < S2, the instruction passes power. Be careful when comparing
real values. For example, if the operand value is 1.99999999999, it is less than 2. When using
the LT instruction, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1 and S2 are not
the same type. Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and S2.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand S1 or S2 is an integer constant

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer variable Data_1

When entering hexadecimal values in operands S1 and S2

When 0x (zero and lower case "x") is input, the following values become hexadecimal
values.

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF

Operand S2 Integer variable Data_1

When entering float constants in operands S1 and S2

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.

Operand S1 Float constant 0.11

Operand S2 Float variable Data_1

When entering real constants in operands S1 and S2

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values become real values.

Operand S1 Real constant 0.11

Operand S2 Real variable Data_1

When comparing data in a specified array (integer variable array) Specify the array using
Data[0] or Data[N] (N indicates an integer variable).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-418

Instruction Descriptions

You cannot specify entire arrays for operands S1 or S2. An error will occur even if the
specified array variables are the same type.

Data_1 Array size = 5

Data_2 Array Size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results in an
error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Data_2 [N] Array Size = 5
Compare processing is performed only on individually
specified array elements.

Program Example
LT
Compares integer variables and outputs the result in D1.

(1)Data_A and the operation result are compared to determine whether Data_A is less than
the operation result. If the result of the LT instruction is S1 < S2, the LT instruction passes
power. Then the instruction to the right of the LT instruction is executed. In the above
diagram, it's the MOV instruction.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-419

Instruction Descriptions

GE (>=)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
GE Comparison 3 to 9
(Greater Than or Equal To
-
Level Sensitive)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and S2 for the GE instruction.
The actual number of steps in the GE instruction depends on the specified operand. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in GE instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Data_2 [0] = 2 steps} + {1 step} = 4 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-420

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and S2 for the GE instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer 3 O
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer 4 O
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real Real Variable 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-421

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Format Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 2 O
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-422

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the GE Instruction

The GE instruction is a compare instruction. The GE instruction compares S1 with S2. If the
result of the comparison is S1 >= S2, the instruction passes power.
Be careful when comparing real values. For example, if the operand value is 1.99999999999,
it is not greater than 2. When using the GE instruction, an error will occur if the variables
specified in operands S1 and S2 are not the same type. Specify the same variable type in
operands S1 and S2.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand S1 or S2 is an integer constant

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer variable Data_1

When entering hexadecimal values in operands S1 and S2

When 0x (zero and lower case "x") is input, the following values become hexadecimal
values.

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF

Operand S2 Integer variable Data_1

When entering float constants in operands S1 and S2

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.

Operand S1 Float constant 0.11

Operand S2 Float variable Data_1

When entering real constants in operands S1 and S2

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values become real values.

Operand S1 Real constant 0.11

Operand S2 Real variable Data_1

When comparing data in a specified array (integer variable array) Specify the array using
Data[0] or Data[N] (N indicates an integer variable).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-423

Instruction Descriptions

You cannot specify entire arrays for operands S1 or S2. An error will occur even if the
specified array variables are the same type.
Data_1 Array size = 5
Data_2 Array Size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results in an
error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Data_2 [N] Array Size = 5
Compare processing is performed only on individually
specified array elements.

Program Example
GE
Compares integer variables and outputs the result in D1.

(1)Data_A and the operation result are compared to determine whether Data_A is greater
than or equal the operation result. If the result of the GE instruction is S1 >= S2, the GE
instruction passes power. Then the instruction to the right of the GE instruction is
executed. In the above diagram, it's the MOV instruction.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-424

Instruction Descriptions

LE (<=)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
LE Comparison 3 to 9
(Less Than or Equal To -
Level Sensitive)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and S2 for the LE instruction.
The actual number of steps in the LE instruction depends on the specified operand. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in LE instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Data_2 [0] = 2 steps} + {1 step} = 4 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-425

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of the S1 and S2 operands for the LE
instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer 3 O
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer 4 O
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify float 3 O
variable[variable]
Real Real Variable 1 O
Specify real variable 2 O
[constant]
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-426

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Format Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 2 O
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-427

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of LE Instructions
The LE instruction is a compare instruction. The LE instruction compares S1 with S2. If the
result of the comparison is S1 <= S2, the instruction passes power.
Be careful when comparing real values. For example, if the operand is 2.000000000001, it is
not less than or equal to 2. When using the LE instruction, an error will occur if the variables
specified in operands S1 and S2 are not the same type. Specify the same variable type in
operands S1 and S2.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand S1 or S2 is an integer constant

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer variable Data_1

When entering hexadecimal values in operands S1 and S2

When 0x (zero and lower case "x") is input, the following values become hexadecimal
values.

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF

Operand S2 Integer variable Data_1

When entering float constants in operands S1 and S2

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.

Operand S1 Float constant 0.11

Operand S2 Float variable Data_1

When entering real constants in operands S1 and S2

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values become real values.

Operand S1 Real constant 0.11

Operand S2 Real variable Data_1

When comparing data in a specified array (integer variable array) Specify the array using
Data[0] or Data[N] (N indicates an integer variable).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-428

Instruction Descriptions

You cannot specify entire arrays for operands S1 or S2. An error will occur even if the
specified array variables are the same type.

Data_1 Array size = 5

Data_2 Array Size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results in an
error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Data_2 [N] Array Size = 5
Compare processing is performed only on individually
specified array elements.

Program Example
LE
Compares integer variables and outputs the result in D1.

(1)Data_A and the operation result are compared to determine whether Data_A is less than
or equal to the operation result. If the result of the LE instruction is S1 <= S2, the LE
instruction passes power. Then the instruction to the right of the LE instruction is
executed. In the above diagram, it's the MOV instruction.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-429

Instruction Descriptions

NE (<>)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
NE Comparison 3 to 9
(Not Equal - Level
Sensitive)

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and S2 for the NE instruction.
The actual number of steps in the NE instruction depends on the specified operand. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Converting the number of steps in NE instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Data_2 [0] = 2 steps} + {1 step} = 4 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-430

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 and S2 for the NE instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer 3 O
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer 4 O
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify float 3 O
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-431

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real Real Variable 1 O
Format Specify real variable 2 O
[constant]
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] 2 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] 3 O
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 2 O
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-432

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of NE Instruction
The NE instruction is a compare instruction. The NE instruction compares S1 with S2. If the
result of the comparison is S1 <> S2, the instruction passes power.
Be careful when comparing real values. For example, if the operand value is
2.000000000001, it is not equal to 2. When using the NE instruction, an error will occur if
the variables specified in operands S1 and S2 are not the same type. Specify the same
variable type in operands S1 and S2.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand S1 or S2 is an integer constant

Operand S1 Integer constant 10

Operand S2 Integer variable Data_1

When entering hexadecimal values in operands S1 and S2

When 0x (zero and lower case "x") is input, the following values become hexadecimal
values.

Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF

Operand S2 Integer variable Data_1

When entering float constants in operands S1 and S2

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values become float values.

Operand S1 Float constant 0.11

Operand S2 Float variable Data_1

When entering real constants in operands S1 and S2

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values become real values.

Operand S1 Real constant 0.11

Operand S2 Real variable Data_1

When comparing data in a specified array (integer variable array) Specify the array using
Data[0] or Data[N] (N indicates an integer variable).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-433

Instruction Descriptions

You cannot specify entire arrays for operands S1 or S2. An error will occur even if the
specified array variables are the same type.

Data_1 Array size = 5

Data_2 Array Size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results in an
error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Data_2 [N] Array Size = 5
Compare processing is performed only on individually
specified array elements.

Program Example
NE
Compares integer variables and outputs the result in D1.

(1)Data_A and the operation result are compared to determine whether Data_A is not equal
to the operation result. If the result of the NE instruction is S1 <> S2, the NE instruction
passes power. Then the instruction to the right of the NE instruction is executed. In the
above diagram, it's the MOV instruction.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-434

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.16 Compare (Time)

JEQ (Equal)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
JEQ Time 3
(= Level Sensitive) Compare

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, S2) in the JEQ
instruction.
The actual number of steps in the JEQ instruction depends on the specified operands. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Calculate the number of steps in the JEQ instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Current time = 1 step} + {1 step} = 3 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

Explanation of the JEQ Instruction

Time variables in JEQ instructions are structure variables. The following table lists the
internal structures.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-435

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2) in the JEQ instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-436

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real Real Variable ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-437

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the JEQ Instruction

The JEQ instruction compares time. When the JEQ instruction is executed, S1 is compared to
S2. The instruction passes power if the result is S1 = S2.
The hour, minute, and second variables are compared simultaneously. To compare a time of
10:20, input 0 for the seconds.
When using JEQ instructions, the only variables you can specify in operands S1 and S2 are
time variables.

Program Example
JEQ
Compares the time variables and determines the result with the coil.

(1) Compares Data_1 to the current time to determine whether they are equal. If the result is
S1 = S2, the instruction passes power and an instruction to the right of the JEQ instruction
is executed. In the above chart, the OUT instruction to the right of the JEQ instruction is
executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-438

Instruction Descriptions

JGT (>)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
JGT Time 3
(> Level Sensitive) Compare

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, S2) in the JGT
instruction.
The actual number of steps in the JGT instruction depends on the specified operands. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Calculate the number of steps in the JGT instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Current time = 1 step} + {1 step} = 3 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

Explanation of the JGT Instruction

Time variables in JGT instructions are structure variables. The following table lists the
internal structures.
Time Variable
Time Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.HR Integer Variable Hours are input in BCD.
VariableName.MIN Integer Variable Minutes are input in BCD.
VariableName.SEC Integer Variable Seconds are input in BCD.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-439

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, S2) in the JGT
instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-440

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable ⎯ X
[variable]
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-441

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the JGT Instruction

The JGT instruction compares time. When the JGT instruction is executed, S1 is compared to
S2. The instruction passes power if the result is S1 > S2.
The hour, minute, and second variables are compared simultaneously. To compare a time of
10:20, input 0 for the seconds.
When using the JGT instruction, the only variables you can specify in operands S1 and S2 are
time variables.

Program Example
JGT
Compares the time variables and determines the result with the coil.

(1) Compares Data_1 to the current time to determine whether Data_1 is greater. If the result
is S1 > S2, the instruction passes power and the instruction to the right of the JGT
instruction is executed. In the above chart, the OUT instruction to the right of the JGT
instruction is executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-442

Instruction Descriptions

JLT (<)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
JLT Time 3
(< Level Sensitive) Compare

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, S2) in the JLT
instruction.
The actual number of steps in the JLT instruction depends on the specified operands. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Calculate the number of steps in the JLT instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Current time = 1 step} + {1 step} = 3 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

Explanation of the JLT Instruction

Time variables in JLT instructions are structure variables. The following table lists the
internal structures.
Time Variable
Time Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.HR Integer Variable Hours are input in BCD.
VariableName.MIN Integer Variable Minutes are input in BCD.
VariableName.SEC Integer Variable Seconds are input in BCD.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-443

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2) in the JLT instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-444

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Format Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-445

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the JLT Instruction

The JLT instruction compares time. When the JLT instruction is executed, S1 is compared to
S2. The instruction passes power if the result is S1 < S2.
The hour, minute, and second variables are compared simultaneously. To compare a time of
10:20, input 0 for the seconds.
When using the JLT instruction, the only variables you can specify in operands S1 and S2 are
time variables.

Program Example
JLT
Compares the time variables and determines the result with the coil.

(1) Compares Data_1 to the current time to determine whether Data_1 is less. If the result is
S1 < S2, the instruction passes power and the instruction to the right of the JLT instruction
is executed. In the above chart, the OUT instruction to the right of the JLT instruction is
executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-446

Instruction Descriptions

JGE (>=)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Name Ladder Symbol Feature Number of Steps
JGE Time Compare 3
(>= Level Sensitive)

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, S2) in the JGE
instruction.
The actual number of steps in the JGE instruction depends on the specified operands. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Calculate the number of steps in the JGE instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Current time = 1 step} + {1 step} = 3 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

Explanation of the JGE Instruction

Time variables in JGE instructions are structure variables. The following table lists the
internal structures.
Time Variable
Time Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.HR Integer Variable Hours are input in BCD.
VariableName.MIN Integer Variable Minutes are input in BCD.
VariableName.SEC Integer Variable Seconds are input in BCD.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-447

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2) in the JGE instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-448

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Format Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e-308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-449

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the JGE Instruction

The JGE instruction compares time. When the JGE instruction is executed, S1 is compared to
S2. If the result is S1 >= S2, the instruction passes power. The hour, minute, and time
variables are compared simultaneously. To compare a time of 10:20, input 0 for the seconds.
When using the JGE instruction, the only variables you can specify in operands S1 and S2
are time variables.

Program Example
JGE
Compares the time variables and determines the result with the coil.

(1) Compares Data_1 to the current time to determine whether Data_1 is greater or equal. If
the result is S1 >= S2, the instruction passes power and the instruction to the right of the
JGE instruction is executed. In the above chart, the OUT instruction to the right of the
JGE instruction is executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-450

Instruction Descriptions

JLE (<=)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
JLE Time 3
(<= Level Sensitive) Compare

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, S2) in the JLE
instruction.
The actual number of steps in the JLE instruction depends on the specified operands. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Calculate the number of steps in the JLE instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Current time = 1 step} + {1 step} = 3 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

Explanation of the JLE Instruction

Time variables in JLE instructions are structure variables. The following table lists the
internal structures.
Time Variable
Time Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.HR Integer Variable Hours are input in BCD.
VariableName.MIN Integer Variable Minutes are input in BCD.
VariableName.SEC Integer Variable Seconds are input in BCD.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-451

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2) in the JLE instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-452

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-453

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the JLE Instruction

The JLE instruction compares time. When the JLE instruction is executed, S1 is compared to
S2. If the result is S1 <= S2, the instruction passes power. The hour, minute and time
variables are compared simultaneously. To compare a time of 10:20, input 0 for the seconds.
When using the JLE instruction, the only variables you can specify in operands S1 and S2 are
time variables.

Program Example
JLE
Compares the time variables and determines the result with the coil.

(1) Compares Data_1 to the current time to determine whether Data_1 is less or equal. If the
result is S1 <= S2, the instruction passes power and the instruction to the right of the JLE
instruction is executed. In the above chart, the OUT instruction to the right of the JLE
instruction is executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-454

Instruction Descriptions

JNE (<>)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
JNE Time 3
(<> Level Sensitive) Compare

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, S2) in the JNE
instruction.
The actual number of steps in the JNE instruction depends on the specified operands. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Calculate the number of steps in the JNE instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Current time = 1 step} + {1 step} = 3 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

Explanation of the JNE Instruction

Time variables in JNE instructions are structure variables. The following table lists the
internal structures.
Time Variable
Time Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.HR Integer Variable Hours are input in BCD.
VariableName.MIN Integer Variable Minutes are input in BCD.
VariableName.SEC Integer Variable Seconds are input in BCD.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-455

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2) in the JNE instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-456

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-457

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the JNE Instruction

The JNE instruction compares time. When the JNE instruction is executed, S1 is compared to
S2. If the result is S1 <> S2, the instruction passes power. The hour, minute and time
variables are compared simultaneously. To compare a time of 10:20, input 0 for the seconds.
When using the JNE instruction, the only variables you can specify in operands S1 and S2
are time variables.

Program Example
JNE
Compares the time variables and determines the result with the coil.

(1) Compares Data_1 to the current time to determine whether they are unequal. If the result
is S1 <> S2, the instruction passes power and the instruction to the right of the JNE
instruction is executed. In the above chart, the OUT instruction to the right of the JNE
instruction is executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-458

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.17 Compare (Date)

NEQ (=)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
NEQ Date 3
(= Level Sensitive) Compare

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, S2) in the NEQ
instruction.
The actual number of steps in the NEQ instruction depends on the specified operands. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Calculate the number of steps in the NEQ instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Current time = 1 step} + {1 step} = 3 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

Explanation of the NEQ Instruction

The date variables in NEQ instructions are structure variables. The following table lists the
internal structures.
Date Variable
Date Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.YR Integer Variable The year is input in BCD.
VariableName.MO Integer Variable The month is input in BCD.
VariableName.DAY Integer Variable The day is input in BCD.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-459

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2) in the NEQ instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-460

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-461

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the NEQ Instruction

The NEQ instruction compares dates. When the NEQ instruction is executed, S1 is compared
to S2. If the result is S1 = S2, the instruction passes power. The year, month and day variables
are compared simultaneously. When using the NEQ instruction, the only variables you can
specify in operands S1 and S2 are date variables.

Program Example
NEQ
Compares the date variables and determines the result with the coil.

(1) Compares Data_1 to the current date to determine whether they are equal. If the result is
S1 = S2, the instruction passes power and the instruction to the right of the NEQ
instruction is executed. In the above chart, the OUT instruction to the right of the NEQ
instruction is executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-462

Instruction Descriptions

NGT (>)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
NGT Date 3
(> Level Sensitive) Compare

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, S2) in the NGT
instruction.
The actual number of steps in the NGT instruction depends on the specified operands. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Calculate the number of steps in the NGT instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Current date = 1 step} + {1 step} = 3 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

Explanation of the NGT Instruction

Date variables in NGT instructions are structure variables. The following table lists the
internal structures.
Date Variable
Date Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.YR Integer Variable The year is input in BCD.
VariableName.MO Integer Variable The month is input in BCD.
VariableName.DAY Integer Variable The day is input in BCD.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-463

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2) in the NGT instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-464

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-465

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the NGT Instruction

The NGT instruction compares dates. When the NGT instruction is executed, S1 is compared
to S2. If the result is S1 > S2, the instruction passes power. The year, month and day variables
are compared simultaneously. When using the NGT instruction, the only variables you can
specify in operands S1 and S2 are date variables.

Program Example
NGT
Compares the date variables and determines the result with the coil.

(1) Compares Data_1 to the current date to determine whether Data_1 is greater. If the result
is S1 > S2, the instruction passes power and the instruction to the right of the NGT
instruction is executed. In the above chart, the OUT instruction to the right of the NGT
instruction is executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-466

Instruction Descriptions

NLT (<)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
NLT Date 3
(< Level Sensitive) Compare

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, S2) in the NLT
instruction.
The actual number of steps in the NLT instruction depends on the specified operands. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Calculate the number of steps in the NLT instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Current date = 1 step} + {1 step} = 3 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

Explanation of the NLT Instruction

Date variables in NLT instructions are structure variables. The following table lists the
internal structures.
Date Variable
Date Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.YR Integer Variable The year is input in BCD.
VariableName.MO Integer Variable The month is input in BCD.
VariableName.DAY Integer Variable The day is input in BCD.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-467

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2) in the NLT instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-468

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-469

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the NLT Instruction

The NLT instruction compares dates. When the NLT instruction is executed, S1 is compared
to S2. If the result is S1 < S2, the instruction passes power. The year, month and day variables
are compared simultaneously. When using the NLT instruction, the only variables you can
specify in operands S1 and S2 are date variables.

Program Example
NLT
Compares the date variables and determines the result with the coil.

(1) Compares Data_1 to the current date to determine whether Data_1 is less. If the result is
S1 < S2, the instruction passes power and the instruction to the right of the NLT
instruction is executed. In the above chart, the OUT instruction to the right of the NLT
instruction is executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-470

Instruction Descriptions

NGE (>=)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
NGE Date 3
(>= Level Sensitive) Compare

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, S2) in the NGE
instruction.
The actual number of steps in the NGE instruction depends on the specified operands. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Calculate the number of steps in the NGE instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Current date = 1 step} + {1 step} = 3 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

Explanation of the NGE Instruction

Date variables in NGE instructions are structure variables. The following table lists the
internal structures.
Date Variable
Date Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.YR Integer Variable The year is input in BCD.
VariableName.MO Integer Variable The month is input in BCD.
VariableName.DAY Integer Variable The day is input in BCD.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-471

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2) in the NGE instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[variable]
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-472

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable ⎯ X
[constant]
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-473

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the NGE Instruction

The NGE instruction compares dates. When the NGE instruction is executed, S1 is compared
to S2. If the result is S1 >= S2, the instruction passes power. The year, month and day
variables are compared simultaneously. When using the NGE instruction, the only variables
you can specify in operands S1 and S2 are date variables.

Program Example
NGE
Compares the date variables and determines the result with the coil.

(1) Compares Data_1 to the current date to determine whether Data_1 is greater or equal. If the
result is S1 >= S2, the instruction passes power and the instruction to the right of the NGE
instruction is executed. In the above chart, the OUT instruction to the right of the NGE
instruction is executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-474

Instruction Descriptions

NLE (<=)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
NLE Date 3
(<= Level Sensitive) Compare

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, S2) in the NLE
instruction.
The actual number of steps in the NLE instruction depends on the specified operands. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Calculate the number of steps in the NLE instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Current date = 1 step} + {1 step} = 3 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

Explanation of the NLE Instruction

Date variables in NLE instructions are structure variables. The following table lists the
internal structures.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-475

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2) in the NLE instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-476

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY 1 O
Structure elements are not
specified.
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-477

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the NLE Instruction

The NLE instruction compares dates. When the NLE instruction is executed, S1 is compared
to S2. If the result is S1 <= S2, the instruction passes power. The year, month and day
variables are compared simultaneously. When using the NLE instruction, the only variables
you can specify in operands S1 and S2 are date variables.

Program Example
NLE
Compares the date variables and determines the result with the coil.

(1) Compares Data_1 to the current date to determine whether Data_1 is less or equal. If the
result is S1<= S2, the instruction passes power and the instruction to the right of the NLE
instruction is executed. In the above chart, the OUT instruction to the right of the NLE
instruction is executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-478

Instruction Descriptions

NNE (<>)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
NNE Date 3
(<> Level Sensitive) Compare

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, S2) in the NNE
instruction.
The actual number of steps in the NNE instruction depends on the specified operands. The
following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand S2 +1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Calculate the number of steps in the NNE instruction

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 = 1 step} + {Current date = 1 step} + {1 step} = 3 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

Explanation of the NNE Instruction

Date variables in NNE instructions are structure variables. The following table lists the
internal structures.

Date Variable
Date Variable Variables Settings Description
VariableName.YR Integer Variable The year is input in BCD
VariableName.MO Integer Variable The month is input in BCD
VariableName.DAY Integer Variable The day is input in BCD

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-479

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, S2) in the NNE instruction.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[constant]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[variable] or
Specify integer variable B/
W[variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-480

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-481

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the NNE Instruction

The NNE instruction compares dates. When the NNE instruction is executed, S1 is compared
to S2. If the result is S1 <> S2, the instruction passes power. The year, month and day
variables are compared simultaneously. When using the NNE instruction, the only variables
you can specify in operands S1 and S2 are date variables.

Program Example
NNE
Compares the date variables and determines the result with the coil.

(1) Compares Data_1 to the current date to determine whether they are unequal. If the result
is S1 <> S2, the instruction passes power and the instruction to the right of the NNE
instruction is executed. In the above chart, the OUT instruction to the right of the NNE
instruction is executed.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-482

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.18 Convert (Data)

BCD/BCDP (BCD Convert)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
BCD Data Convert 3 to 7
(BCD Convert -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
BCDP Data Convert 3 to 7
(BCD Convert -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the BCD/BCDP
instructions.
The actual number of steps in the BCD/BCDP instructions depends on the specified
operands. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example:Calculate the number of steps in BCD/BCDP instructions (for the number of steps
in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 [0] =2 steps} + {Conversion result [Specify indirectly] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6

steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-483

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1, D1) in the BCD/BCDP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
S1 = I/O
Possible Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
D1 = Input ∗(Notes 1) specified
Not Possible Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable [variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-484

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
S1 = I/O
Possible Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
D1 = Input Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Not Possible Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
∗(Notes 2)
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D1 = Not
Possible I_∗(Notes 2) ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer 0 to 99999999 1 O
∗(Notes 3) ∗(Notes 3)
D1 = Not Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
Possible ±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-485

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the BCD/BCDP Instructions

The BCD/BCDP instructions convert values to binary coded decimal. The value in S1 is
converted to a binary coded decimal and stored in D1.
BCD and BCDP instructions always pass power. The maximum value you can convert in
operand S1 is 0x5F5E0FF.
If you try to convert a value that cannot be converted, the value in D1 becomes undefined.
When using BCD/BCDP instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in
operands S1 and D1 are not the same type.
Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

When operand D1 is an integer variable and you want to input hexadecimal values in
operand S1.
When 0x (zero and lower case x) is input, the following values are interpreted as
hexadecimals.
Operand S1 Integer constant 0xF
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

When converting data in a specified array (integer variable array), specify the array with
Data [0] or Data [N] (N is an integer variable).
When operands S1 and D1 specify the entire array, an error will occur even if the variables
are the same type.

Data_1 Array size = 5

Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [n] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables in
the array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-486

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
BCD
Converts a constant to binary coded decimal and stores it in the result data.

When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the BCD instruction will be executed.
When the BCD instruction is executed, 10 (1010 in binary) is converted to a binary coded
decimal and the binary code 0001 0000 <F3> is stored in D1. When using a normally
open instruction, the BCD instruction is always executed as long as the normally open
instruction variable remains ON.

Program Example
BCDP

(1) The BCDP and BCD instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
BCDP instruction, only the upward transition is detected and the BCDP instruction is
executed even when using a normally open instruction. Even if the normally open
instruction variable remains ON, the BCDP instruction is executed only once (for 1 scan).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-487

Instruction Descriptions

For example BCD conversion of S1 (Data_A) = "99999999" to D1 (Data_B).

Bit Position 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data_A
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Bit Position
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data_B
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

BIN/BINP (BIN Convert)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
BIN Data Convert 3 to 7
(BIN Convert -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
BINP Data Convert 3 to 7
(BIN Convert -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the BIN/BINP
instructions.
The actual number of steps in the BIN/BINP instructions depends on the specified operands.
The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example:Calculate the number of steps in BIN/BINP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 [0] =2 steps} + {Conversion result [Specify indirectly] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6

steps
One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-488

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the BIN/BINP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
S1 = I/O
Possible Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
D1 = Input ∗(Notes 1) specified
Not Possible Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable [variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-489

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
S1 = I/O
Possible Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
D1 = Input Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Not Possible Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
∗(Notes 2)
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D1 = Not
Possible I_ ∗(Notes 2) ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST 2 O
only
Constant Integer 0 to 99999999 (BCD value) 1 O
∗(Notes 3) ∗(Notes 3)
D1 = Not Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
Possible ±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 ⎯ X
to
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-490

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the BIN/BINP Instructions

The BIN/BINP instructions converts BCD values to binary. The value in S1 is converted to
binary and stored in D1.
BIN and BINP instructions always pass power. The maximum value you can convert in
operand S1 is 0x5F5E0FF.
If you try to convert a value that cannot be converted, the value in D1 becomes undefined.
When using the BIN/BINP instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in
operands S1 and D1 are not the same type.
Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 10
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

Data_1 Array size = 5

Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [n] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables in
the array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-491

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
BIN
Converts a constant from BCD to binary and stores the converted value in the result data.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the BIN instruction will be executed.
When the BIN instruction is executed, 0001 0000 (10 in hexadecimal) is converted to
binary and the value 1010 is stored in D1. When using a normally open instruction, the
BIN instruction is always executed as long as the normally open instruction variable
remains ON.

Program Example
BINP

(1) The BINP and BIN instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
BINP instruction, only the upward transition is detected and the BINP instruction is
executed even when using a normally open instruction. Even if the normally open
instruction variable remains ON, the BINP instruction is executed only once (for 1 scan).

For exampleBIN conversion of S1 (Data_A) = "99999999" BCD to D1 (Data_B).

Bit Position 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data_A
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

Bit Position
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Data_B
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-492

Instruction Descriptions

ENCO/ENCOP (Encode)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
ENCO Data Convert 3 to 7
(Encode -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
ENCOP Data Convert 3 to 7
(Encode -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the ENCO/
ENCOP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the ENCO/ENCOP instructions depends on the specified
operands. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example:Calculate the number of steps in ENCO/ENCOP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 [0] =2 steps} + {Conversion result [Specify indirectly] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6

steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-493

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the ENCO/
ENCOP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
S1 = I/O
Possible Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
D1 = Input ∗(Notes 1) specified
Not Possible Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] array
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable [variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-494

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
S1 = I/O
Possible Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
D1 = Input Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Not Possible Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
∗(Notes 2)
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D1 = Not
Possible I_∗(Notes 2) ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer −2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
∗(Notes 3) ∗(Notes 3)
D1 = Not Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
Possible ±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-495

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the ENCO/ENCOP Instructions

The ENCO/ENCOP instructions encode values. The value in S1 is encoded and saved in D1.
Among the 32 bits of S1, the position of the ON bit is output to D1 as a binary value. When
multiple bits are ON in S1, the uppermost bit position is output. The ENCO/ENCOP
instructions always pass power.
When using ENCO/ENCOP instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in
operands S1 and D1 are not the same type.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 8
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

When operand D1 is an integer variable and you want to input hexadecimal values in
operand S1.
When 0x (zero and lower case "x") is input, the following values will be interpreted as
hexadecimal values.
Operand S1 Integer constant 0 x 10
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

To convert data in a specified array (integer variable array), you can either specify the entire
array with operands S1 and D1, or specify the array elements individually.

Data_1 Array Size = 5

Result Array Size = 5
Determines the bit status of the entire array.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [n] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables
in the array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-496

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
ENCO
Converts a constant and stores the converted value in the result data.

When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the ENCO instruction will be executed.
When the ENCO instruction is executed, 0000 1000 (8 in hexadecimal) is converted and
the binary value 0011 (3) is stored in D1. When using a normally open, the ENCO
instruction is always executed as long as the normally open instruction variable remains
ON.

Program Example
ENCOP

(1) The ENCOP and ENCO instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In
the ENCOP instruction, only the upward transition is detected and the ENCOP instruction
is executed even when using a normally open instruction. Even if the normally open
instruction variable remains ON, the ENCOP instruction is executed only once (for 1
scan).

Example: When 0x00000008 is input in S1, the output in D1 will be 0x00000003.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-497

Instruction Descriptions

DECO/DECOP (Decode)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
DECO Data Convert 3 to 7
(Decode -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
DECOP Data Convert 3 to 7
(Decode -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the DECO/
DECOP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the DECO/DECOP instructions depends on the specified
operands. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example:Calculate the number of steps in DECO/DECOP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Conversion result [Specify indirectly] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6

steps

One final step is required in the total number of steps in the instruction. Be sure to add 1 step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-498

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the DECO/
DECOP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Only a word is specified. 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
S1 = I/O
Possible Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
D1 = Input ∗(Notes 1) specified
Not Possible Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant] array
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable [variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-499

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
S1 = I/O
Possible Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
D1 = Input Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Not Possible Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
∗(Notes 2)
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D1 = Not
Possible I_∗(Notes 2) ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W [address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer 0 to 131071 (Specified array) 1 O
∗(Notes 3) ∗(Notes 3)
D1 = Not Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
Possible ±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-500

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the DECO/DECOP Instructions

The DECO/DECOP instructions decode values. The value in S1 is decoded and saved in D1.
The single bit position in D1 corresponding to the value in S1 is turned ON. When you use an
output array, you can decode a bit position up to the maximum (4096 x 32 -1 =131071).
The DECO/DECOP instructions always pass power. When using DECO/DECOP
instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 are not the
same type. Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is an integer variable

Operand S1 Integer constant 8
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

When operand D1 is an integer variable and you want to input hexadecimal values in
operand S1.
When 0x (zero and lower case "x") is input, the following values are interpreted as
hexadecimal values.
Operand S1 Integer constant 0 x 10
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT2

To convert data in a specified array (integer variable array), you can either specify the entire
array with operands S1 and D1, or specify the array elements individually.

Data_1 Array Size = 5

Result Array Size = 5
Determines the bit status of the entire array.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [n] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables
in the array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-501

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
DECO
Converts a constant and stores the converted value in the result data.

When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the DECO instruction will be executed.
When the DECO instruction is executed, 0000 1000 (8 in hexadecimal) is converted and
the binary value 1 0000 0000 is stored in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the DECO instruction is always executed as long
as the normally open instruction variable remains ON.

Program Example
DECOP

(1) The DECOP and DECO instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In
the DECOP instruction, only the upward transition is detected and the DECO instruction
is executed even when using a normally open instruction. Even if the normally open
instruction variable remains ON, the DECOP instruction is executed only once (for 1
scan).

For example When 3 is input in S1, the output D1 becomes 8.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-502

Instruction Descriptions

RAD/RADP (Convert to Radians)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
RAD Data Convert 3 to 7
(Convert to Radians -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
RADP Data Convert 3 to 7
(Convert to Radian -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1 and D1) in the RAD/
RADP instructions.
The actual number of steps in the RAD/RADP instructions depends on the specified
operands. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example:Calculate the number of steps in RAD/RADP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Conversion result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-503

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1 and D1) in the RAD/
RADP instructions.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real Real Variable 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-504

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1) Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
D1 = Not ∗(Notes 1) ±3.402823466e+38
Possible
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
∗(Notes 1) ±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-505

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the RAD/RADP Instructions

RAD and RADP instructions are radian conversion instructions that convert degrees to
radians. When the RAD instruction is executed and passes power, the number of degrees is
input in S1, and the converted number of radians is stored in D1. Pi is approximately
3.1415926535897 (real number). RAD and RADP instructions always pass power.
When using RAD/RADP instructions, an error will occur if the variables specified in
operands S1 and D1 are not the same type.
Specify the same variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values are interpreted as float
values.
Operand S1 Float constant 0.11
Operand D1 Float variable OUT1

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values are interpreted as real values.
Operand S1 Real constant 0.11
Operand D1 Real variable OUT2

Data_1 Array size = 5

Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [N] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables in
the array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-506

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
RAD

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the RAD instruction will be executed.
When the RAD instruction is executed, the result of Data_A is stored in D1.
When using a normally open, the RAD instruction is always executed as long as the
normally open instruction variable remains ON.

Program Example
RADP

(1) The RADP and RAD instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
RADP instruction, only the upward transition is detected and the RADP instruction is
executed even when using a normally open instruction. Even if the normally open
instruction variable remains ON, the RADP instruction is executed only once (for 1 scan).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-507

Instruction Descriptions

DEG/DEGP (Convert to Degrees)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
DEG Data Convert 3 to 7
(Convert to Degrees -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
DEGP Data Convert 3 to 7
(Convert to Degrees -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the DEG/DEGP
instructions.
The actual number of steps in the DEG/DEGP instructions depends on the specified
operands. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example:Calculate the number of steps in DEG/DEGP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Conversion result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-508

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the DEG/DEGP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-509

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1) Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
D1 = Not ∗(Notes 1) ±3.402823466e+38
Possible
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
∗(Notes 1) ±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-510

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the DEG and DEGP Instructions

The DEG/DEGP instructions convert values to degrees. The unit of angular measure, radian,
is converted to degrees and stored in D1.
Pi is approximately 3.1415926535897 (real number). DEG and DEGP instructions always
pass power. When using DEG and DEGP instructions, specify the same data type in operands
S1 and D1 to avoid errors.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values are interpreted as float
values.
Operand S1 Float constant 0.11
Operand D1 Float variable OUT1

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values are interpreted as real values.
Operand S1 Real constant 0.11
Operand D1 Real variable OUT2

Data_1 Array size = 5

Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [N] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables
in the array.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-511

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
DEG

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the DEG instruction will be executed.
When the DEG instruction is executed, the result of Data_A is stored in D1.
When using a normally open, the DEG instruction is always executed as long as the
normally open instruction variable remains ON.

Program Example
DEGP

(1) The DEGP and DEG instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
DEGP instruction, only the upward transition is detected and the DEGP is executed even
when using a normally open instruction. Even if the normally open instruction variable
remains ON, the DEGP instruction is executed only once (for 1 scan).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-512

Instruction Descriptions

SCL/SCLP (Scale Convert)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
SCL Data Convert 7 to 11
(Scale Convert -
Level Sensitive)

Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Name Steps
SCLP Data Convert 7 to 11
(Scale Convert -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the SCL/SCLP
instructions.
The actual number of steps in the SCL/SCLP instruction depends on the specified operands.
The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Convert the number of steps in the SCL/SCLP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next page.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Conversion result [N] = 3 steps} + {5 steps} = 10 steps

The last five steps are included in the instruction. Be sure to add those five steps.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-513

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the SCL/SCLP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
D1 = Input
Not Possible Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
∗(Notes 1) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real Real Variable 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-514

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
∗(Notes 2)
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D1 = Not
Possible I_ ∗(Notes 2) ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
∗(Notes 3) Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
D1 = ±3.402823466e+38
Constant Not Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to 2 O
Possible ±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-515

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the SCL/ SCLP Instructions

The SCL/SCLP instructions convert values to scales. The value in S1 is converted according
to the upper and lower limits and the converted value is stored in D1. An error will occur if
the variables specified in operands S1 and D1 are not the same type. Specify the same
variable type in operands S1 and D1.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand D1 is a float variable

When 0f (zero and lower case "f") is input, the following values are interpreted as float
values.
Operand S1 Float constant 0.11
Operand D1 Float variable OUT1

When operand D1 is a real variable

When 0r (zero and lower case "r") is input, the following values are interpreted as real values.
Operand S1 Real constant 0.11
Operand D1 Real variable OUT2

Data_1 Array size = 5

Result Array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Array size = 5

Result [N] Array size = 5
Calculations are performed on individual variables in
the array.

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-516

Instruction Descriptions

Upper and Lower Limits for Input and Output

Double-click the SCL instruction to display the following dialog box. In the dialog box,
specify the settings for the maximum and minimum input values and for output A and output
B.

(Notes 1) When setting the maximum/minimum input values and output values A and B, you
cannot indirectly designate array elements.
Array Variable Name: Data
Array Size: 5
O Data [0] X Data [N]
(Note 2) When using real or float variables in operands S1 or D1, and using constants to
define the minimum/maximum input and output values in A and B, use "0r" and
"0f" to denote real and float values.

When output value A is greater than output value B

A B

When A > B When A < B

Input Range - Max

Output Value Input Value Output Value
Input Range - Max
Input Range - Min
Input Value
B A
Input Range - Min

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-517

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
SCL
Converting an analog input value (0 to 4095) to a current value in the range of 4 to 20 [ma]
and expressing the value as a decimal.
In the SCL instruction settings in the dialog box, set maximum input value = 0r4095,
minimum input value = 0r0, A = 0r20, and B =0r4.

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the SCL instruction will be executed.
When the SCL instruction is executed, the result of Data_A is stored in D1.
When using a normally open, the SCL instruction is always executed as long as the
normally open instruction variable remains ON.

Program Example
SCLP

(1) The SCLP and SCL instructions differ by when they run. In the SCLP instructions, even
when using a normally open instruction, only the positive transition is detected and the
SCLP instruction is executed. Therefore, the SCLP instruction is executed only for one
scan, even when the normally open instruction bit remains ON. 31

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-518

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.19 Convert Type

I2F/I2FP (Integer to Float Conversion)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
I2F Type Convert 3 to 7
(Integer to Float
Conversion -
Level Sensitive)
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
I2FP Type Convert 3 to 7
(Integer to Float
Conversion -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the I2F/I2FP
instructions.
The actual number of steps in the I2F/I2FP instructions depends on the specified operands.
The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example:Calculate the number of steps in the I2F/I2FP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Conversion result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-519

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in the I2F/I2FP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
including I/O
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
∗(Notes 1) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-520

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ 1 O
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 1 O
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-521

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the I2F/I2FP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-522

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-523

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the I2F/I2FP Instructions

The I2F/I2FP instructions convert integer variables to float variables. Specify the integer
variable or constant in S1 that you want to convert, and specify float variable for the
conversion output in D1. You can specify only an integer variable for input in S1 and a float
variable for output in D1. Use the convert instruction when you want to use different variable
types in a calculation or Comparison.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand S1 is an integer constant

Operand S1 Integer constant 10
Operand D1 Float variable OUT1

When operand S1 is an integer constant and you want to input a hexadecimal value
in operand S1.
When 0x (zero and lower case "x") is input, the following values become hexadecimal
values.
Operand S1 Integer constant 0xFF
Operand D1 Float variable OUT2

Note that specified arrays (entire arrays) cannot be converted.

When operands S1 and D1 specify the entire array, an error will occur even if the specified
variables are the same type.

Data_1 Integer array size = 5

Result Float array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Integer array size = 5

Result [N] Float array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram
operates normally.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-524

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
I2F

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the I2F instruction will be executed.
When the I2F instruction is executed, the result of the I2F conversion of Data_A is stored
in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the I2F instruction is always executed as long as
the normally open instruction variable remains ON.

Program Example
I2FP

(1) The I2FP and I2F instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
I2FP instruction, only the upward transition is detected and the I2FP instruction is
executed even when using a normally open instruction. Even if the normally open
instruction variable remains ON, the I2FP instruction is executed only once (for 1 scan).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-525

Instruction Descriptions

I2R/I2RP (Integer to Real Conversion)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
I2R Type Convert 3 to 7
(Integer to Real
Conversion -
Level Sensitive)
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
I2RP Type Convert 3 to 7
(Integer to Real
Conversion -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions of Operands (S1, D1) in the I2R/I2RP
instructions.
The actual number of steps in the I2R/I2RP instructions depends on the specified operands.
The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example:Calculate the number of steps in the I2R/I2RP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Conversion result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-526

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in the I2R/I2RP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
including I/O
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
∗(Notes 1) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-527

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-528

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the I2R/I2RP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real Real Variable 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-529

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ 1 O
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-530

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the I2R/I2RP Instructions

The I2R/I2RP instructions convert integer variables to real variables. Specify the integer
variable or constant in S1 that you want to convert, and specify real variable for the
conversion output in D1. You can specify only an integer variable for input in S1 and a real
variable for output in D1. Use the convert instruction when you want to use different variable
types in a calculation or Comparison.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand S1 is an integer constant

Operand S1 Integer constant 10
Operand D1 Real variable OUT1

Note that specified arrays (entire arrays) cannot be converted.

When operands S1 and D1 specify the entire array, an error will occur even if the specified
variables are the same type.

Data_1 Integer array size = 5

Result Real array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram
results in an error.

Data_1 [0] Integer array size = 5

Result [N] Real array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram
operates normally.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-531

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
I2R

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the I2R instruction will be executed.
When the I2R instruction is executed, the result of the I2R conversion of Data_A is stored
in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the I2R instruction is always executed as long as
the normally open instruction variable remains ON.

Program Example
I2RP

(1) The I2RP and I2R instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
I2RP instruction, only the upward transition is detected and the I2RP instruction is
executed even when using a normally open instruction. Even if the normally open
instruction variable remains ON, the I2RP instruction is executed only once (for 1 scan).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-532

Instruction Descriptions

F2I/F2IP (Float to Integer Conversion)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
F2I Type Convert 3 to 7
(Float to Integer
Conversion -
Level Sensitive)
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
F2IP Type Convert 3 to 7
(Float to Integer
Conversion -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the F2I/F2IP
instructions.
The actual number of steps in the F2I/F2IP instructions depends on the specified operands.
The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example:Calculate the number of steps in the F2I/F2IP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Conversion result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-533

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in the F2I/F2IP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-534

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-535

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the F2I/F2IP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Output only
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
∗(Notes 1) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-536

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-537

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the F2I/F2IP Instructions

The F2I/F2IP instructions convert float variables to integer variables. Specify the float
variable or constant in S1 that you want to convert, and specify integer variable for the
conversion output in D1. You can specify only a float variable for input in S1 and an integer
variable for output in D1. Use the convert instruction when you want to use different variable
types in a calculation or Comparison.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand S1 is a float constant

Operand S1 Float constant 0f0.11
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

Note that specified arrays (entire arrays) cannot be converted.

When operands S1 and D1 specify the entire array, an error will occur even if the specified
variables are the same type.
Data_1 Float array size = 5
Result Integer array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Float array size = 5

Result [N] Integer array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram
operates normally.

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

#L_CalcZero System variable that turns ON when the result is 0.
#L_CalcCarry System variable that turns ON when the result overflows.
#L_CalcErrCode System variable that stores the error code when an operation
error occurs.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-538

Instruction Descriptions

Program Example
F2I

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the F2I instruction will be executed.
When the F2I instruction is executed, the result of the F2I conversion of Data_A is stored
in D1.
When using normally open instruction, the F2I instruction is always executed as long as
the normally open instruction variable remains ON.

Program Example
F2IP

(1) The F2IP and F2I instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
F2IP instruction, only the upward transition is detected and the F2IP instruction is
executed even when using a normally open instruction. Even if the normally open
instruction variable remains ON, the F2IP instruction is executed only once (for 1 scan).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-539

Instruction Descriptions

F2R/F2RP (Float to Real Conversion)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
F2R Type Convert 3 to 7
(Float to Real Conversion
-
Level Sensitive)
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
F2RP Type Convert 3 to 7
(Float to Real Conversion/
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the F2R/F2RP
instructions.
The actual number of steps in the F2R/F2RP instructions depends on the specified operands.
The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example:Calculate the number of steps in the F2R/F2RP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Conversion result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-540

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in the F2R/F2RP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-541

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to 1 O
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-542

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the F2R/F2RP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Output only
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real Real Variable 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-543

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-544

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the F2R/F2RP Instructions

The F2R/F2RP instructions convert float variables to real variables. Specify the float variable
or constant in S1 that you want to convert, and specify real variable for the conversion output
in D1. You can specify only a float variable for input in S1 and a real variable for output in
S2. Use the convert instruction when you want to use different variable types in the
calculation and Comparison.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand S1 is a float constant

Operand S1 Float constant 0f0.11
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

Note that specified arrays (entire arrays) cannot be converted.

When operands S1 and D1 specify the entire array, an error will occur even if the specified
variables are the same type.

Data_1 Float array size = 5

Result Integer array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Float array size = 5

Result [N] Integer array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram
operates normally.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-545

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
F2R

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the F2R instruction will be executed.
When the F2R instruction is executed, the result of the F2R conversion of Data_A is
stored in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the F2R instruction is always executed as long
as the normally open instruction variable remains ON.

Program Example
F2RP

(1) The F2RP and F2R instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
F2RP instruction, only the upward transition is detected and the F2RP instruction is
executed even when using a normally open instruction. Even if the normally open
instruction variable remains ON, the F2RP instruction is executed only once (for 1 scan).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-546

Instruction Descriptions

R2I/R2IP (Real to Integer Conversion)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
R2I Type Convert 3 to 7
(Real to Integer
Conversion -
Level Sensitive)
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
R2IP Type Convert 3 to 7
(Real to Integer
Conversion -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the R2I/R2IP
instructions.
The actual number of steps in the R2I/R2IP instructions depends on the specified operands.
The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example:Calculate the number of steps in the R2I/R2IP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Conversion result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-547

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in the R2I/R2IP instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real Real Variable 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-548

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-549

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the R2I/R2IP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Output only
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
∗(Notes 1) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-550

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Timer .PT/.ET only 2 O
Format Counter .PV/ .CV only 2 O
∗(Notes 1)
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
Output only
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ 1 O
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only 2 O
C_ .PV/ .CV only 2 O
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only 2 O
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only 2 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only 2 O
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-551

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the R2I/R2IP Instructions

The R2I/R2IP instructions convert real variables to integer variables. Specify the real
variable or constant in S1 that you want to convert, and specify integer variable for the
conversion output in D1. You can specify only a real variable for input in S1 and an integer
variable for output in D1. Use the convert instruction when you want to use different variable
types in a calculation or comparison.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand S1 is a real constant

Operand S1 Real constant 0r0.11
Operand D1 Integer variable OUT1

Note that specified arrays (entire arrays) cannot be converted.

When operands S1 and D1 specify the entire array, an error will occur even if the specified
variables are the same type.

Data_1 Real array size = 5

Result Integer array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Real array size = 5

Result [N] Integer array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram operates
normally.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-552

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
R2I

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the R2I instruction will be executed.
When the R2I instruction is executed, the result of the R2I conversion of Data_A is stored
in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the R2I instruction is always executed as long as
the normally open instruction variable remains ON.

Program Example
R2IP

(1) The R2IP and R2I instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
R2IP instruction, only the upward transition is detected and the R2IP instruction is
executed even when using a normally open instruction. Even if the normally open
instruction variable remains ON, the R2IP instruction is executed only once (for 1 scan).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-553

Instruction Descriptions

R2F/R2FP (Real to Float Conversion)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
R2F Type Convert 3 to 7
(Real to Float Conversion
-
Level Sensitive)
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
R2FP Type Convert 3 to 7
(Real to Float Conversion
-
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the R2F/R2FP
instructions.
The actual number of steps in the R2F/R2FP instructions depends on the specified operands.
The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example:Calculate the number of steps in the R2F/R2FP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Data_1 [0] = 2 steps} + {Conversion result [N] = 3 steps} + {1 step} = 6 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-554

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in the R2F/R2FP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real Real Variable 1 O
Specify real variable [constant] 2 O
Specify real variable [variable] 3 O
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-555

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-556

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the R2F/R2FP
instructions.
Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O
Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Output only
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Float Variable 1 O
Specify float variable[constant] 2 O
Specify float variable[variable] 3 O
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-557

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Variable Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Format Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Output only
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ 1 O
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-558

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the R2F/R2FP Instructions

The R2F/R2FP instructions convert real variables to float variables. Specify the real variable
or constant in S1 that you want to convert, and specify float variable for the conversion
output in D1. You can specify only a real variable for input in S1 and a float variable for
output in D1. Use the convert instruction when you want to use different variable types in a
calculation or comparison.
Refer to the following for specifying a constant.

When operand S1 is a real constant

Operand S1 Real constant 0r0.11
Operand D1 Float variable OUT1

Note that specified arrays (entire arrays) cannot be converted.

When operands S1 and D1 specify the entire array, an error will occur even if the specified
variables are the same type.

Data_1 Real array size = 5

Result Float array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram results
in an error.

Data_1 [0] Real array size = 5

Result [N] Float array size = 5
The operand specification in the left diagram
operates normally.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-559

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
R2F

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the R2F instruction will be executed.
When the R2F instruction is executed, the result of the R2F conversion of Data_A is
stored in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the R2F instruction is always executed as long
as the normally open instruction variable remains ON.

Program Example
R2FP

(1) The R2FP and R2F instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
R2FP instruction, only the upward transition is detected and the R2FP instruction is
executed even when using a normally open instruction. Even if the normally open
instruction variable remains ON, the R2FP instruction is executed only once (for 1 scan).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-560

Instruction Descriptions

H2S/H2SP (Time to Seconds)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
H2S Type Convert 3 to 5
(Time to Seconds
Conversion -
Level Sensitive)
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
H2SP Type Convert 3 to 5
(Time to Seconds
Conversion -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the H2S/H2SP
instructions.
The actual number of steps in the H2S/H2SP instructions depends on the specified operands.
The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example:Calculate the number of steps in the H2S/H2SP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next section.)

{Elapsed time = 1 step} + {Total seconds [0] = 2 steps} + {1 step} = 4 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-561

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in the H2S/H2SP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time Other than .HR / .MIN / .SEC 1 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-562

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ Other than .HR / .MIN / .SEC 1 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-563

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the H2S/H2SP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Output only
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
∗(Notes 1) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-564

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Explanation of the H2S/H2SP Instructions

The H2S/H2SP instructions convert seconds in time variables to integer variables. Specify
the time variable in S1 that you want to convert, and specify integer variable for the
conversion output in D1. You can specify only a time variable for input in S1 and an integer
variable for output in S2. Time variables cannot be configured in arrays. 0:30 will be
converted to 1800 seconds and 14:00 will be converted to 50400 seconds.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-565

Instruction Descriptions

System Variables Indicating Execution Results

When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
H2S

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the H2S instruction will be executed.
When the H2S instruction is executed, the result of the H2S conversion of Data_A is
stored in D1.
When using a normally open instruction, the H2S instruction is always executed as long
as the normally open instruction variable remains ON.

Program Example
H2SP

(1) The H2SP and H2S instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
H2SP, only the upward transition is detected and the H2SP instruction is executed even
when using a normally open instruction. Even if the normally open instruction variable
remains ON, the H2SP instruction is executed only once (for 1 scan).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-566

Instruction Descriptions

S2H/S2HP (Seconds to Time)

Symbols and Features
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
S2H Type Convert 3 to 5
(Seconds to Time
Conversion -
Level Sensitive)
Ladder Instruction Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Name Steps
S2HP Type Convert 3 to 5
(Seconds to Time
Conversion -
positive transition)

Operand Settings
The following shows the configurable conditions for Operands (S1, D1) in the S2H/S2HP
instructions.
The actual number of steps in the S2H/S2HP instructions depends on the specified operands.
The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
Number of steps in operand S1 + Number of steps in operand D1 + 1 = Total number of steps
in one instruction

Example: Calculate the number of steps in the S2H/S2HP instructions

(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings in the next page.)

{Elapsed time = 1 step} + {Total seconds [0] = 2 steps} + {1 step} = 4 steps

One last step is included in the instruction. Be sure to add that one step.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-567

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (S1) in the S2H/S2HP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only 1 O
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only 1 O
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ 1 O
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
∗(Notes 1)
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Output only
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
∗(Notes 1) specified
Specify integer 2 O
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable 3 O
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
specified
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-568

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-569

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operand (D1) in the S2H/S2HP
instructions.

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
Address (Example: [PLC1]D0000)
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Word Specify by words only ⎯ X
(Example:
[#INTERNAL]LS0000)
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Word ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit Specify a bit ⎯ X
Format Specify bit array ([constant]) ⎯ X
Specify bit array ([variable]) ⎯ X
Integer Arrays and modifiers are not ⎯ X
(not including I/O) specified
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant]
Specify integer variable ⎯ X
[Variable]
Specify integer ⎯ X
variable[constant/variable]
.B/W[constant/variable]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify float variable[constant] ⎯ X
Specify float variable[variable] ⎯ X
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Specify real variable [constant] ⎯ X
Specify real variable [variable] ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time Other than .HR / .MIN / .SEC 1 O
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-570

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_∗∗∗∗.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
J_ Other than .HR / .MIN / .SEC 1 O
U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Constant Integer − 2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float ±1.175494351e−38 to ⎯ X
±3.402823466e+38
Real ±2.2250738585072014e−308 to ⎯ X
±1.7976931348623158e+308

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-571

Instruction Descriptions

Explanation of the S2H/S2HP Instructions

The S2H/S2HP instructions convert integer variables to seconds in time variables. Specify
the integer variable in S1 that you want to convert, and specify time variable for the
conversion output in D1. You can specify only an integer variable for input in S1 and a time
variable for output in D1. Time variables cannot be configured in arrays. 0:30 will be
converted to 1800 seconds. 14:00 will be converted to 50400 seconds.
System Variables Indicating Execution Results
When the execution result is 0, #L_CalcZero turns on.
When the execution results in an error, the error code is stored in #L_CalcErrCode.

Program Example
S2H

(1) When the positive transition instruction turns ON, the S2H instruction will be executed.
When the S2H instruction is executed, the result of the S2H conversion of Data_A is
stored in D1.
When using normally open instruction, the S2H instruction is always executed as long as
the normally open instruction variable remains ON.

Program Example
S2HP

(1) The S2HP and S2H instructions have different ways of detecting when to execute. In the
S2HP instruction, only the upward transition is detected and the S2HP instruction is
executed even when using a normally open instruction. Even if the normally open
instruction variable remains ON, the S2HP instruction is executed only once (for 1 scan).

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-572

Instruction Descriptions

29.5.20 I/O Driver Instructions

SDOR, SDOW, DGMT, DGSL (CANopen Driver)
Symbols and Features
Ladder Ladder Symbol Feature Number of
Instruction Name Steps
SDOR Defined Node 9 to 21
read object
dictionary

Ladder Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Instruction Name Steps
SDOW Defined Node 9 to 21
write to object
dictionary

Ladder Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Instruction Name Steps
DGMT Read the state on the 5 to 9
master.

Ladder Ladder Symbol Feature Number of

Instruction Name Steps
DGSL Read the state on the 5 to 9
slave.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-573

Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of operands S1 to S10, and D1 to D5 for I/O
Driver Instructions.
The number of steps in I/O Driver instructions depends on the specification method and the
number of operands used. The following describes how to calculate the number of steps.
3 + Number of steps in operand S1 + ... + Number of steps in operand S10 + Number of steps
in operand D1 + ... + Number of steps in operand D5 = Total number of steps in one
instruction

• For more information regarding each operand, please refer to the following.
) "30.7.6 Using I/O Driver Instructions" (page 30-180)

For example,Converting the number of steps in SDOR, SDOW, DGMT and DGMT
(For the number of steps in an operand, refer to the operand settings on the next page.)
SDOR

3 Steps + {Object = 1 Step} + {SubIdx = 1 Step} + {NodeID = 1 Step} + {Length = 1

Step} + {Offset = 1 Step} + {ErrorCode = 1 Step} = 9 Steps
SDOW

3 Steps + {Object = 1 Step} + {SubIdx = 1 Step} + {NodeID = 1 Step} + {Length = 1

Step} + {Offset = 1 Step} + {ErrorCode = 1 Step} = 9 Steps
DGMT

3 Steps + {Status = 1 Step} + {Event = 1 Step} = 5 Steps

DGSL

3 Steps + {NodeID = 1 Step} + {Diagnostics = 1 Step} = 5 Steps

The first three steps are the number of steps required by all I/O Driver Instructions. Be sure to
add these three steps for I/O Driver Instructions.
GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-574
Instruction Descriptions

Operand Settings
The following describes the specifiable content of Operands (S1 to S10 and D1 to D5).

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
External Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Device Integer ⎯ ⎯ X
Address
Internal Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Address Integer ⎯ ⎯ X
Symbol Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Integer ⎯ ⎯ X
Variable Bit ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Integer Arrays and modifiers are not 1 O
*(Note 1) *(Note 1) specified
Sx=Input and
Specify integer 2 O
output not
variable[constant]
allowed
Dx=Input and Specify integer variable 3 O
output not [Variable]
allowed Specify integer variable B/ ⎯ X
W[variable]
Specify integer variable B/W
[constant]
Float ⎯ ⎯ X
Real ⎯ ⎯ X
Timer .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
Counter .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
Date .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Time .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
PID .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST only ⎯ X
Continued

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-575

Instruction Descriptions

Name Type Condition Number of Possible: O

Steps in the Not
Operand Possible: X
Address X_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Format Y_ ⎯ ⎯ X
M_ ⎯ ⎯ X
I_ ⎯ ⎯ X
Q_ ⎯ ⎯ X
D_ Modifiers are not specified 1 O
D_****.B/W[constant] ⎯ X
D_****.B/W[address] ⎯ X
F_ ⎯ ⎯ X
R_ ⎯ ⎯ X
T_ .PT/.ET only ⎯ X
C_ .PV/ .CV only ⎯ X
N_ .YR/ .MO/ .DAY only ⎯ X
Address J_ .HR/ .MIN/ .SEC only ⎯ X
Format U_ .KP/ .TR/ .TD/ .PA/ .BA/ .ST ⎯ X
only
Constant Integer -2147483648 to 2147483647 ⎯ X
Float +/-1.17549435138 e-38 to ⎯ X
+/-3.402823466e+38
Real +/-2.2250738585072014e-308 to ⎯ X
+/-1.7976931348623158e+308

Explanation of SDOR, SDOW, DGMT and DGMT Instructions

• From the I/O Driver, the SDOR instruction runs the SDO command (read) defined in the
source operand. After the I/O Driver completes the SDO command, execution results are
set to the destination operand.
• From the I/O Driver, the SDOW instruction runs the SDO command (write) defined in the
source operand. After the I/O Driver completes the SDO command, execution results are
set to the destination operand.
• From the I/O Driver, the DGMT instruction reads the master diagnostic results. The I/O
Driver then sets the read results to the destination operand.
• From the I/O Driver, the DGSL instruction reads the slave diagnostic results defined in
the source operand. The I/O Driver then sets the read results to the destination operand.
• Instructions execute when they receive power, and pass power for one scan after the
instruction completes execution.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-576

Instruction Descriptions

• For more information regarding SDOR, SDOW, DGMT, and DGSL

instructions (CANopen driver), refer to the following.
) "30.7 Controlling External I/O by Using HTB" (page 30-146)

Restrictions
• An error occurs if these instructions are not set up with the CANopen driver, or when
operands are set up with invalid data types.
• You can use up to 15 I/O Driver instructions, which includes other I/O Drivers.
• These instructions can be used in the MAIN and SUB programs only. They cannot be
used in INIT.
• Instructions executed only at startup, such as MOVP, cannot be supported. To execute
instructions only at startup, use PT instructions.

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-577

Instruction Descriptions

GP-Pro EX Reference Manual 29-578

FX Training Manual
100% (2)
FX Training Manual
128 pages
Delta Ia-Plc DVP-PLC PM en 20140804
No ratings yet
Delta Ia-Plc DVP-PLC PM en 20140804
749 pages
.CLP Delta - DVP-ES2 - EX2 - SS2 - SA2 - SX2 - SE&TP-Program - O - EN - 20130222 EDITADO
No ratings yet
.CLP Delta - DVP-ES2 - EX2 - SS2 - SA2 - SX2 - SE&TP-Program - O - EN - 20130222 EDITADO
782 pages
Delta PLC-Program O en 20130530
No ratings yet
Delta PLC-Program O en 20130530
753 pages
Mitsubishi
100% (1)
Mitsubishi
378 pages
PLC User Manual (CNC System) V2.0
100% (1)
PLC User Manual (CNC System) V2.0
112 pages
Vs Series
No ratings yet
Vs Series
484 pages
Delta Ia-Plc DVP-PLC PM en 20200605 PDF
100% (1)
Delta Ia-Plc DVP-PLC PM en 20200605 PDF
746 pages
I605 Ev+ Language Reference Manual en
No ratings yet
I605 Ev+ Language Reference Manual en
684 pages
Dvp-Plc-Program o en 20120416
No ratings yet
Dvp-Plc-Program o en 20120416
695 pages
RCX3 PGM e V2.15
No ratings yet
RCX3 PGM e V2.15
486 pages
Chapter 9: PLC Programming Language - STL/SFC Instructions
No ratings yet
Chapter 9: PLC Programming Language - STL/SFC Instructions
47 pages
Custom Macro
100% (1)
Custom Macro
31 pages
Mitsubishi
No ratings yet
Mitsubishi
350 pages
L Series GXWorks2 Programming RevA
No ratings yet
L Series GXWorks2 Programming RevA
208 pages
DVPPLC
No ratings yet
DVPPLC
586 pages
Asus PC P6 P7H55E Manual
0% (1)
Asus PC P6 P7H55E Manual
67 pages
Delta DVP-ES2 EX2 SS2 SA2 SX2 SE&TP-Program O EN 20130222 PDF
No ratings yet
Delta DVP-ES2 EX2 SS2 SA2 SX2 SE&TP-Program O EN 20130222 PDF
782 pages
PLC Training ManualQ Series Basic Course (For GX Developer) E
No ratings yet
PLC Training ManualQ Series Basic Course (For GX Developer) E
374 pages
Mitsubishi PLC Ladder Logic Instructions Guide
No ratings yet
Mitsubishi PLC Ladder Logic Instructions Guide
5 pages
Siemens Script
No ratings yet
Siemens Script
180 pages
MKD G46f-Pp1o PP3D
No ratings yet
MKD G46f-Pp1o PP3D
363 pages
Dvp-Plc-Program o en 20101119
No ratings yet
Dvp-Plc-Program o en 20101119
618 pages
LadderProgramConverter Appendices (Mitsubishi)
No ratings yet
LadderProgramConverter Appendices (Mitsubishi)
161 pages
Case Study Atm
100% (1)
Case Study Atm
16 pages
Embedded Xinu
No ratings yet
Embedded Xinu
194 pages
12factor 200129214915 PDF
No ratings yet
12factor 200129214915 PDF
269 pages
MAZAKManuals1066 PDF
No ratings yet
MAZAKManuals1066 PDF
27 pages
Quick Guide of Seetong Access Cloud IP Camera - EN V1.1
No ratings yet
Quick Guide of Seetong Access Cloud IP Camera - EN V1.1
2 pages
Appendix
No ratings yet
Appendix
118 pages
Dictionary in Python
No ratings yet
Dictionary in Python
11 pages
Script
No ratings yet
Script
68 pages
Cae Cilt Day 6
No ratings yet
Cae Cilt Day 6
48 pages
Fpwin 6.1
No ratings yet
Fpwin 6.1
53 pages
DVP-PLC Application Manual: 【Programming 】
No ratings yet
DVP-PLC Application Manual: 【Programming 】
4 pages
Facon Instructions - 5
No ratings yet
Facon Instructions - 5
14 pages
LDmicro - Manual Ingles
0% (1)
LDmicro - Manual Ingles
17 pages
TILOS 10.2 Release Notes
No ratings yet
TILOS 10.2 Release Notes
4 pages
Manual LDMicro
No ratings yet
Manual LDMicro
15 pages
Iq Platform Compatible Programmable Controller Engineering Software Melsoft GX Works2
No ratings yet
Iq Platform Compatible Programmable Controller Engineering Software Melsoft GX Works2
48 pages
PLC Instruction List
No ratings yet
PLC Instruction List
4 pages
GX Works2 Brochure - L08122ef
No ratings yet
GX Works2 Brochure - L08122ef
48 pages
ConverterFromEngineeringValue Template Manual - bcnp59990046c
No ratings yet
ConverterFromEngineeringValue Template Manual - bcnp59990046c
9 pages
Vitc Bcse308l M1 L2
No ratings yet
Vitc Bcse308l M1 L2
30 pages
Ds 30518
No ratings yet
Ds 30518
33 pages
CH 7 Numerical Control
No ratings yet
CH 7 Numerical Control
29 pages
ECE 303 and 353 - LAB - Manual
No ratings yet
ECE 303 and 353 - LAB - Manual
30 pages
Release Notes 18 7 6 1010.2 OEM PV
No ratings yet
Release Notes 18 7 6 1010.2 OEM PV
14 pages
PLC Omron
No ratings yet
PLC Omron
16 pages
Custom Macro B
100% (2)
Custom Macro B
25 pages
Boot - Device AFF - A150 ASA - A150 AFF - C190 AFF - A220 ASA - AFF A220 - FAS2720 50 Ev20 024a
No ratings yet
Boot - Device AFF - A150 ASA - A150 AFF - C190 AFF - A220 ASA - AFF A220 - FAS2720 50 Ev20 024a
19 pages
Overview of High Availability and Disaster Recovery
No ratings yet
Overview of High Availability and Disaster Recovery
39 pages
No ratings yet
16 pages
CheckPoint R80.10 ReleaseNotes
No ratings yet
CheckPoint R80.10 ReleaseNotes
27 pages
2 FreeRTOS LwIP Zyny Zedboard
No ratings yet
2 FreeRTOS LwIP Zyny Zedboard
18 pages
Memory Mapping S2 Series
No ratings yet
Memory Mapping S2 Series
12 pages
JARKOM - Setting Modem Yang Digunakan Untuk Layanan Internet Pascabayar (Telkom Speedy)
No ratings yet
JARKOM - Setting Modem Yang Digunakan Untuk Layanan Internet Pascabayar (Telkom Speedy)
14 pages
Chapter 5 Description of Function Instructions
No ratings yet
Chapter 5 Description of Function Instructions
14 pages
01-07-CPU BOX (COM A B) Cable-02
No ratings yet
01-07-CPU BOX (COM A B) Cable-02
6 pages
Q1 What Is Thread? Explain Any 2 Multithreading Models in Brief With Diagram
No ratings yet
Q1 What Is Thread? Explain Any 2 Multithreading Models in Brief With Diagram
4 pages
Complete Lessonplan Aca 12 Unki
No ratings yet
Complete Lessonplan Aca 12 Unki
19 pages
CUCM PLAR Configuration Example
No ratings yet
CUCM PLAR Configuration Example
9 pages
NSX Architecture Components Review
No ratings yet
NSX Architecture Components Review
5 pages
As - 8125gs-tnhr
No ratings yet
As - 8125gs-tnhr
4 pages
Data Handling Instructions
No ratings yet
Data Handling Instructions
5 pages
Uninstall Dragon Age 2
No ratings yet
Uninstall Dragon Age 2
3 pages
SEDCAD4 Information 2-2023hjllll
No ratings yet
SEDCAD4 Information 2-2023hjllll
4 pages
Mobaile Code
No ratings yet
Mobaile Code
3 pages
SiCK-68 Cost Breakdown
No ratings yet
SiCK-68 Cost Breakdown
2 pages
Conjoint Analysis Submission
No ratings yet
Conjoint Analysis Submission
2 pages
ALGORITHM
No ratings yet
ALGORITHM
2 pages
Iphone 14 Pro
No ratings yet
Iphone 14 Pro
1 page
Backpropagation: Fundamentals and Applications for Preparing Data for Training in Deep Learning
From Everand
Backpropagation: Fundamentals and Applications for Preparing Data for Training in Deep Learning
Fouad Sabry
No ratings yet